JP2023084073A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having a characteristic in control means.SOLUTION: A game machine includes main control means capable of starting a setting confirmation state when predetermined operation means is operated from a first operation state to a second operation state when it is determined that both a first door body and a second door body are open and capable of setting a game state to a game disabled state while the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state when it is determined that the first door body is closed and the second door body is open, and capable of setting a game state to a game enabled state while the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state when it is determined that both the first door body and the second door body are closed, and display means capable of displaying a performance display corresponding to the game situation in the game enabled state, capable of displaying an administrator display in the setting confirmation state, and capable of displaying a certain display different from both the performance display and the administrator display in the game disabled state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of game machines. Some of such slot machines are equipped with control means for setting an advantageous state for the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-73461 A

However, conventional game machines have room for improvement in control means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine having a characteristic control means.

In order to solve the above problems, the game machine according to the present invention includes:
Main control means for controlling a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
A door body that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
open/close determination means for determining an open/closed state of the door;
a predetermined operating means having a first operating state and a second operating state as operating states;
A game machine comprising display means,
The door body includes a first door body and a second door body,
The main control means is
A plurality of states including at least a playable state in which the game can be progressed, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set values can be confirmed, and a game impossible state in which the game cannot be progressed. can be set to either
When the opening/closing determination means determines that both the first door body and the second door body are in the open state, the predetermined operation means changes from the first operation state to the second operation. when operated into a state, capable of initiating said verify settings state;
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the first door body is in the closed state and the opening/closing determination means determines that the second door body is in the open state, the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state, it is possible to make the game impossible state,
When the opening/closing determination means determines that both the first door body and the second door body are in the closed state, the predetermined operation means remains operated to the second operation state. , means for enabling the playable state,
The display means is
In the playable state, it is possible to display an effect display according to the game situation,
In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to display a display for administrator,
Means capable of displaying a certain display in the unplayable state,
The certain display is a display different from the effect display and is a display different from the display for administrator,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic control means.

1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. FIG. It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112). (b) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing; 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing; 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting value confirmation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of another device monitoring process; (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of setting change mode in a time series. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of setting confirmation mode in a time series. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the display example 1 of the management screen in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the display example 3 of the management screen in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 1 in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 2 in chronological order. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the example 1 of a display of a management screen and an error notification in time series. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of setting history display in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in time series when the management screen is not displayed. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in a time series when the management screen is displayed. It is a simple game flow showing the game state of the AT system. (a) It is the figure which showed the example of transition of the production|presentation state in an advantageous area. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in a normal stage. (c) A diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for a CZ lottery during stock time. It is a diagram showing an example of production in stock time in chronological order. It is a diagram showing an example of production in a normal stage in chronological order. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines of the slot machine 100. FIG. It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112). It is a diagram showing types of winning combinations, names of condition devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, number of payouts, and remarks. (a) It is a diagram showing a symbol combination, a payout number, and a remark corresponding to a small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) and a small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination). (b) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game in which the small win 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and the AT game. (c) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the setting suggestion effect A in the game in which the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination) is internally won. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A. FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect A selection table used in the setting suggestion effect A lottery. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high-probability mode and low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B. FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used for the setting suggestion effect B lottery. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example 1 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing example 2 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B in chronological order; 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. FIG. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 42 is a flow chart showing the flow of initial setting processing (step S101) in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 41; FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S206) in the initial setting processing of FIG. 42; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; 45 is a flow chart showing the flow of device monitoring processing (step S408) in the main controller timer interrupt processing of FIG. 44; FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting value confirmation processing (step S501) in the device monitoring processing of FIG. 45; FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process of FIG. 45; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an operation example when setting change is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example when setting value confirmation is executed. (A) is a diagram showing an operation example when the front door 102 is closed during setting change execution, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example when the front door 102 is closed during setting value confirmation execution. . FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when the setting key SW is ON; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of error notification and error cancellation operations; (A) is a diagram showing an operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting change, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart regarding error detection. It is a figure which shows the modification of error notification and error cancellation. It is a figure which shows the modification at the time of closing the front door 102 during setting value confirmation execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement for confirmation of a shutter. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement for confirmation of a speaker. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement for confirmation of a shutter.

<<Embodiment 1>>
A gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 (door body) attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. And prepare. Note that the front door 102 (door body) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 (FIG. 4 ( a) see). As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are vertically displayed approximately three times from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. there is

By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light part and the light-receiving part. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates to the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in a bonus game (during a special game state). It is a lamp that informs The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be. On the left side of the medal slot 141, there is a cross key 193a (second operation means, upper button , down button, right button, and left button) and an OK button 193b (hereinafter collectively referred to as "cross button 193").

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The number-of-payout display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a pushing-order effect. In this example, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 (operating means) is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop buttons) 137 to 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop. The operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order (or push order).

The order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is as follows: left stop button 137 is indicated by "left or R", middle stop button 138 by "middle or C", and right stop button 139 by "right or R". , (1) left→middle→right operation order (left center right or LCR), (2) left→right→middle operation order (left center right or LRC), (3) middle→left→right operation order ( (Central Right Left or CLR), (4) Middle→Right→Left Operation Order (Center Right Left or CRL), (5) Right→Left→Center Operation Order (Right Left Center or RLC), (6) Right→Center→Left There are six types of operation order (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 . The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加

This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (display means) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. It has a structure that appears on the player's side.

It should be noted that the display means does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. A display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen may be used. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened.

The main body 101 is a box-like body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below, three reels 110-112 are arranged. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key switch (first operation means, also referred to as “setting key SW”, not shown) that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation is provided. The setting key SW is an operation means for starting to change or confirm settings of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), which will be described later. Further, inside the body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter, also referred to as a “reset SW”) is provided that can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) by pressing the switch. The reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch that enables an operation for canceling various errors (error canceling operation) to be described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at positions that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, and are operated when the front door 102 (door body) is in the closed state. is difficult or impossible to operate. In other words, it is an operating means that can be operated only by the administrator (staff, etc.) of the game parlor, and is an operating means that cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 12) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Although details will be described later, when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any one of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting value is set by operating the start lever 135. Once the value is confirmed, the setting value is hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the lower plate 264, and a power supply device having a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as the main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500, which will be described later. do. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 264 , and the power cord 264 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 .

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting a key owned by the manager of the amusement arcade into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

The side plate 260 on the right side of the main body 101 is provided with an optical sensor (detecting means, hereinafter also referred to as an "open/close sensor", not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass between the light-receiving portion and the light-receiving portion.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including the open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in an open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is not blocked, the open/close sensor indicates an open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is open. , the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, and may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, and the like. Further, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door body is opened and closed. Conversely, even when the door is in the closed state, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet closer.

Above the symbol display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and a speaker 272 are provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181 .

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 (this circuit contains two random number generation circuits) that derives a numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a. and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 Game control is started (main control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

A random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers used in the basic circuit 302 . Random number generation in the random number generation circuit 316 can be broadly divided into two methods: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at predetermined time intervals is obtained and derived as a random number. There are two more methods in random mode. A first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method is to read numerical values from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical values as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random value generation circuit 316 uses the value obtained in this way as the initial value of the counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random value, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical type of reel 110 sensors, an optical sensor of the reel 111, an optical sensor of the reel 112, an open/close sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through. It becomes L level every time. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

As described above, the open/close sensor is a sensor capable of detecting the open/close state of the front door (door body) 102 . When the front door 102 is closed, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a low level signal) to the CPU 304 indicating that the door is closed. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in an open state, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a high-level signal) indicating an open detection state to the CPU 304 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 (external collective terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the provided information input circuit 652 .

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. It is

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface, and a pressing operation of the production button 156. is connected to the effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting the . The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 performs various controls of the production device 160 including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157 . The second sub control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units such as .

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(a). In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonuses (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are used as a combination to transition to a bonus game, and the replay is a replay without inserting new medals. The winning combination may be called a "working combination" to be distinguished from the winning combination. included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay combinations. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (operating role) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning a prize. . The corresponding symbol combinations are "white 7-white 7-white 7" for BB1 and "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating internal winning is set is maintained until the next game and thereafter, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2. The combination "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "Bonus-Bonus-Bonus". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game) (details will be described later), the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) and the display of the symbol combination on the winning line are not the starting conditions. Second, the regular bonus game is automatically started after the start of the big bonus game, and when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started. may be

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell)" (hereinafter simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The pattern combinations are "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 should be "cherry", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

A "replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is a default RT-based game state (hereinafter also referred to as “normal game state”) that is initially set immediately after the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on. This game state is relatively disadvantageous compared to other game states.

In this example, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when a replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1) or replay combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is won, a replay high probability state (RT2) described later transition to Also, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when a special combination is internally won, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Replay High Probability State (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this replay high probability state (RT2), when a special combination is internally won, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role internal elected state (RT3)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, the special combination corresponding to this flag is won. This is a game state in which the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed.

In this example, when a special role is won in this special role internal winning state (RT3), the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In this example, in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered.

In this example, the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are not particularly limited. It may be the case that the game has been played a number of times (for example, 6 times).

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main processing of the main control unit according to the control program pre-stored in the ROM 306 .

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Although the details will be described later, in this initial setting process, processes related to initial setting, setting change, recovery process, and the like are performed.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, the presence or absence of insertion of medals is checked, and preparations are made to transmit an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-controller 400 . In addition, if the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, and the replay state is entered. No input required. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed, and in the next step S105, an internal winning combination lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Preparations are made to transmit the internal lottery command shown to the first sub-control unit 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S106, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation, for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small winning combination (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting processing>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, initialization is performed at startup. In this startup initialization, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition setting, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, the WDT 314 Permission to operate and setting of initial values.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (opening). If the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204.If the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S205 for return processing. to run. In step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. If it is ON, the process advances to step S206 to execute the setting change process. If it is OFF, the process advances to step S205 to execute the return process. .

In the recovery process of step S205, the process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power failure (for example, the recovery data saved in the RAM 308 in the power failure process of step S411 of the main controller timer interrupt process, etc.) is executed. After that, the initialization process ends.

In step S206, after performing the setting change process, the process proceeds to step S207. Although the details will be described later, in this setting change processing, processing related to setting change and the like are performed.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, the initialization process is finished after executing the process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) and the like.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process.

In step S301, a process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, preparations are made to transmit a setting change start command indicating to start setting change to the first sub-controller 400. I do. When receiving this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen.

In step S303, the interrupt status is set during setting change. As a result, in the various game processes in step S404 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the process corresponding to the setting change is executed.

In step S304, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated. If the reset switch has been operated, the current setting value is changed. , the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed.

More specifically, in the processing of steps S305 to S307, each time the operation of the reset switch is detected once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and the set value is changed to 6. The set value is changed by repeatedly executing the process of returning to 1 when exceeding. If it is determined in step S307 that the start lever 135 has been operated, the operation of changing the set value by the reset SW is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new setting value (the setting value is confirmed), and in the next step S309, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased. and hide the setting value.

In this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is received. The configuration may be such that the set value is determined only in the case of the state. In this case, when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the setting value cannot be confirmed, but the display of the management screen may be continued.

In step S310, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the process of step S310 is repeated. In step S311, preparations are made to transmit a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S402, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>406 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S407, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this device monitoring process, set value confirmation processing, door opening monitoring processing, settlement processing, and the like are performed.

In step S409, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 is set in each original register, and the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S411, when power is restored, a specific variable and stack pointer for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. and return to the main control unit main processing.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main controller timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the device monitoring process.

In step S501, after the set value confirmation process is performed, the process proceeds to step S502. Although the details will be described later, in this setting value confirmation processing, processing related to setting confirmation is performed. In step S502, door opening monitoring processing is performed.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the closed detection state, close detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected is stored in the RAM 308. In addition to storing the information, preparations are made to transmit a door closure detection command indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-controller 400 . When the door closing detection command is received from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 generates closing detection information indicating that the closing of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "closed"). , closing date and time) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information.

On the other hand, in the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating an open detection state, outputs open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected. While storing it in the RAM 308 , preparations are made for transmitting a door open detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-controller 400 . When the first sub control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 generates open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "open"). , date and time of opening) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and door opening notification is performed.

Although the door open notification will be described later, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speaker 2
72, 277) outputs an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is being opened"). Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a character string "Door is being opened" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

In step S503, after performing the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the settlement button 134 sensor during the effective period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when the game can be started until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). When a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated is detected, processing for settlement of electronically accumulated medals is performed, and a settlement command indicating that processing for settlement of medals has been executed is issued by the first subcontroller. Prepare for transmission to unit 400 .

In step S504, after performing other device monitoring processes, the device monitoring process ends. Although the details will be described later, in the other device monitoring process, an error notification start process, an error notification end process, and the like are performed.

<Setting value confirmation processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, setting value confirmation processing (step S501) in the device monitoring processing described with reference to FIG. 9 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the set value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the set value is being checked. If the set value is being checked, the process proceeds to step S606, and if the set value is not being checked, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the setting value confirmation valid period, and if it is the setting value confirmation valid period, the process proceeds to step S603, and if it is not the setting value confirmation valid period, the setting value confirmation processing is terminated.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not the MAX bet state (the state in which the number of medals that can start one game (three in this example) is betted, or the replay state due to replay), but the opening and closing This is the period during which the sensor is not in a closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and an error is not being reported.

It should be noted that the conditions regarding the setting value confirmation effective period may be any one of the above conditions or any plurality of the above conditions, instead of all of the above conditions.

At step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. In step S604, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the numeral 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made to send a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When receiving this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen.

In step S606 during setting confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the setting value confirmation processing is terminated so as to continue setting confirmation. If it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S607. move on. In step S607, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value, and in the next step S608, a setting confirmation end command indicating to end the setting confirmation is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. make preparations for When the first sub control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not each error is detected. If not, the other device monitoring process ends, and if each error is detected, the process advances to step S702.

Here, errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment include door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error), medal insertion errors 2 to 4, medal Payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormalities, RAM defects, prize winning abnormalities, and the like.

A door open error (door open error) is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened (becomes an error detection state), and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. (It becomes an error non-detection state).

As described above, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor in the door opening monitoring process, and upon detecting a signal indicating the closed detection state, transmits the door closing detection command to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the closed detection information (in this example, information indicating “closed” and the date and time of closing) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information. When the signal indicating is detected, the door open detection command is sent to the first sub-controller 400, and the first sub-controller 400 receives the open detection information (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and door opening notification is performed.

A hopper empty error is a payout error relating to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number (becomes an error detection state), and the prescribed number of medals is reached. Replenishing the hopper with the above medals will solve the problem (the error will not be detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) occurs when the inserted medals remain in the medal selector or the like (becomes an error detection state). ) is accepted (error non-detection state). Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number (error detection state), and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM (error non-detection state).

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on (becomes an error detection state) other than during medal insertion processing, and medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medal is inserted. This occurs when the sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are not passed normally (becomes an error detection state). After removing the cause of the error, it is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted. (It becomes an error non-detection state).

Medal payout error 1 occurs when there is no payout of medals for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven (an error is detected), and medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven. (error detection state), and medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on (becomes an error detection state) other than during medal payout processing. After removing the cause, the error is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted (the error is not detected).
.

An overflow error occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box turns on (becomes an error detection state), and after removing the cause of the error, the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted. (Error non-detected state). A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (an error detection state), and is resolved when an operation of an error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted (an error non-detection state). Become). A winning abnormality occurs when a winning pattern different from the winning determined by internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (error detection state), and the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is performed. It is canceled when it is accepted (it becomes an error non-detection state).

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not it is an error reportable period, and if it is not an error reportable period, the process proceeds to other device monitoring processing, and if it is an error reportable period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error reportable period is a period during which the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not each error is being reported. If not, the process proceeds to step S704, and if each error is being reported, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S704, error notification start processing is executed.

In this error notification start process, the main control section 300 displays an error code on the payout number indicator 127 and prepares for transmitting an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control section 400 . When the first sub-controller 400 receives this error command from the main controller 300, it executes processing to start error notification.

Error notification will be described later, but in this example, when a selector error occurs, a character string "Selector error occurred!" Please call the store clerk." is displayed, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound ("An error has occurred. Please call the game clerk") is output. The mode of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, error notification may be performed by movement of the movable means (reels 110 to 112).

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (opening). If the door is open, the other device monitoring process is terminated. proceed to In step S706, it is determined whether or not the error notification termination condition is satisfied. If the error notification termination condition is not satisfied, the other device monitoring process is terminated. , the process proceeds to step S707.

Here, the error notification termination condition is a condition that is met when an error cancellation operation (in this example, an operation to turn on the reset SW) is received in an error non-detection state.

In step S707, error notification end processing is executed. In this error notification termination process, the main control section 300 erases the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 and transmits an error resolution command corresponding to the resolved error to the first sub-control section 400. prepare for When receiving this error resolution command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the error notification that is being executed.

In step S708, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. If it is OFF, other device monitoring processing is terminated so as to continue displaying the management screen. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S709. move on. In step S709, the main control unit 300 sends to the first sub-control unit 400 a preparatory screen display command for instructing start of display of the preparatory screen (see, for example, FIG. 16(A)(4)). prepare. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main controller 300, the first sub-controller 400 displays the preparation screen until it becomes possible to display the management screen, or it is possible to display the management screen. Even if it is, for a predetermined period of time, the process of displaying the screen during preparation, etc. is executed.

<Management screen>
Next, the management screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 18. FIG.

Here, the management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a store clerk of a game parlor to make various settings related to the slot machine 100 . The display contents of the administrator screen are not particularly limited, but in this example, the administrator screen SD shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B can be displayed.

The administrator screen SD of this example is composed of a title display of "system settings" indicating that it is a screen for administrator and a plurality of types of menu displays. The menu display in this example includes power saving setting, time setting, error history setting, and setting history. , right key, left key) or the OK button 193b, any item on the menu display can be arbitrarily selected.

For example, when the power saving setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the power saving mode (for example, to set the volume of the speakers 272 and 277, and to easily set the brightness of LEDs and various lamps). , and when the time setting item is selected, the date and time can be set.

In addition, when an error history item is selected on the administrator screen SD, the history of errors that have occurred in the game machine in the past, the opening/closing history of the front door 102, the power-on/power-off/recovery history, etc. can be displayed, and when the setting history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations. The opening/closing history of the front door 102 and the setting history in the error history will be described later.

Items that can be selected on the administrator screen SD are not limited to this example. It may be possible to set an error sound or the like to be output, or it may be possible to set the light intensity of an LED or various lamps.

Next, before describing the management screen SD, terms used in subsequent drawings will be described with reference to FIG. 12(A).

"Power state" indicates the state of power supplied to the slot machine 100 from the outside, "Power OFF" indicates the state in which power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, and "Power ON" indicates the state of the slot machine. 100 is supplied with power.

"Reel operating state" indicates the operating state of the reels 110 to 112, "stopped" is the state in which all of the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and "operating" indicates at least the reels 110 to 112. One is a rotating state, which is synonymous with "rotating".

The "door closed state/door open state" indicates the state of the front door 102, the "door closed state" is the state in which the front door 102 is closed, and the "door open state" is the state in which the front door 102 is closed. The door 102 is open. "Closed detection state/open detection state" indicates the state of the open/close sensor. A state in which the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state by a predetermined operation, and the "open detection state" is a state in which it is detected that the front door 102 is in the open state. is.

"Non-inserted state/inserted state" indicates whether or not medals are inserted. "Non-inserted state" is the state in which medals are not inserted, and "inserted state" is the state in which medals are inserted. state, or replay state due to replay winning. "Error detected state" indicates whether an error is detected, "error non-detected state" indicates a state in which no error is detected, and "error detected state" indicates an error detected. is in a state of

"Setting key SW" indicates the state of the setting key SW, "ON" indicates that the setting key SW is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the setting key SW is OFF. "Reset SW" indicates the state of the reset SW, "ON" indicates that the reset SW is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the reset SW is OFF.

"Start lever" indicates the state of the start lever 135, "ON" indicates that the start lever 135 is ON, and "OFF" indicates that the start lever 135 is OFF. "Stop button" indicates the state of the stop buttons 137 to 139, "non-operation" indicates the state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated, and "stop operation" indicates the state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated. state. "Cross button" indicates the state of the cross button 193, "non-operation" is the state in which the cross button 193 is not operated, and "specific operation" is the state in which the cross button 193 is operated.

"Luminous body" indicates the operation state of the light emitting means (in this example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.)), and "light off" indicates that the light emitting means is turned off. The "open luminous mode" is a state in which the luminous means emits light in an open luminous mode indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state. 112 is a state in which the light emitting means is emitting light in a light emission mode during stop indicating that the machine is in stop.

"Output sound" indicates the operating state of the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 in this example), "non-output" indicates a state in which sound is not output from the sound output means, and "setting change sound" is a state in which the sound output means is outputting a setting change sound indicating that the setting is being changed, and "open sound" is a state in which the sound output means indicates that the front door 102 is open. A state in which a sound is being output, and "stopping BGM" is a state in which stopping BGM indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are being stopped is output from the sound output means. "Display example" indicates an example of display contents displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. FIG.

<Setting change mode>
Next, the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12(A). FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the flow of the setting change mode in chronological order.

<Turn on the setting key SW in the setting change mode/power OFF>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(A)(1), the setting key SW is turned ON by the manager of the amusement arcade when the power supply is OFF, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed to turn on the setting key SW.

In this state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output, and the display means (liquid crystal display device) 157) is hidden.

<Setting change mode/starting setting change mode, displaying management screen>
The states shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B are those in which the power switch is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade in the state where the setting key SW is ON, as described with reference to FIG. 12A and 1). This is a state in which the power state has changed from power OFF to power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on in a state in which the setting key SW is turned ON from OFF. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode), and a setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277).

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state, an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON. is performed, display of a management screen (management display) can be started.

More specifically, in steps S203 and S204 of the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 7 is started. In this example, the setting change process is started because the front door 102 is open and the setting key SW is ON.

Subsequently, in step S302 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start changing the setting to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting display of the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Subsequently, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a. As shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

<Setting change mode/change of set value>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A)(3) is a state in which the reset SW has been operated once by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

In steps S305 to S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 updates the currently set setting values 1 to 6 by adding 1 each time the operation of the reset switch is detected. The set value is changed by repeatedly executing the process of returning to 1 when the value exceeds 6. In this example, one operation of the reset switch was detected. , the setting value display device 101a displays the number 1 indicating setting 1. FIG.

<Setting change mode/Set value confirmation>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A)(4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

When determining that the start lever 135 has been operated in step S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 changes the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a to a new one in subsequent steps S308 and S309. The set value is stored (confirmed) as a set value, and the display of the set value display device 101a is erased to hide the set value. As shown in (4), the display of the set value display device 101a is erased.

<End of setting change mode/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

When determining that the setting key SW is OFF in step S310 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting change end command from the main controller 300, it executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12(A)(5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Setting confirmation mode>
Next, the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12(B). FIG. 12B is a diagram showing the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door closed state>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B)(1) is a state in which the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor is in the state of detection of closing, and the stop effect is being executed.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop light emission mode, and the stop BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), In the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), an effect during stop is displayed.

<Setting confirmation mode/front door: door closed state → door open state)>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B)(2) is the front door 102 opened in the door body closed state described with reference to FIG. It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound. Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the effect during stop is continued.

<Setting confirmation mode/power ON, front door (door body open state), setting key SW ON>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(B)(3), the power supply state shown in FIG. An operator performs an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW is turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed.

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state). When an operation (a certain operation) is performed, it is configured to be able to start displaying a management screen SD (management display).

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation effective period, the setting key SW is ON, and the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. do.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 12(B)(3), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Setting confirmation mode / end of setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B)(4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

When determining that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation end command indicating to end the setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, when the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-controller 400 executes the process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12(B)(4), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Display example 1 of management screen>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 13(A)(1) to 13(A)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode described using FIGS. 12(B)(1) to 12(B)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the game parlor. , the management screen SD has started to be displayed.

13(A)(1) to 13(A)(2), the front door 102 is opened. Therefore, in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), in addition to (or instead of) executing the stopped effect, an open notification (for example, An image including a character string "the door is open") may be displayed (the same applies to other embodiments).

<Management screen display example 1/open/close sensor: open detection state → closed detection state>
The state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4) is a state in which the detection state of the open/close sensor is forced to the closed detection state by a predetermined operation in the setting confirmation mode.

Even if the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management screen SD (management display) is displayed, the slot machine 100 can be used for management. It is configured to continue displaying the screen SD (display for management).

More specifically, in steps S601 and S606 of the setting value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. The process ends and the setting confirmation mode is continued. In this example, since the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, the management screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(A)(4). Continue to display SD.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4), the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the open/close sensor is the closed detection state, the luminous body (various lamp 420, etc.) is turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that has been outputting the opening sound is set to non-output.

<Management screen display example 1/Exiting setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 13(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation processing described with reference to FIG. 1 sub-control unit 400, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing to end the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 13(A)(5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Management screen display example 1/Turn on the setting key SW with the open/close sensor (closed detection state)>
The state shown in FIG. 13(A)(6) is an operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON by the manager of the amusement arcade when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. ) is performed and the setting key SW is turned ON.

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is in the closed detection state, an operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. It is configured such that the display of the management screen SD (management display) cannot be started even if it is changed.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the subsequent step S604.

In this example, since the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state and the set value confirmation valid period is not reached, the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent step S604 is not executed. is not displayed. In addition, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, so the display as shown in FIG. 13(A)(6) In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the effect during stop is continued.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW) capable of switching from OFF to ON by rotating, and a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate (for example, in FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; , the detection state can be changed to the open detection state, and a predetermined operation regarding the detection means (for example, a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is inserted and fixed with tape, etc.), the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state even if the door is in the open state, and the display The means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). ), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state in which the reel is rotating, the certain operation is The management display is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the operation is performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by a stop button, the display of the management display is started, and When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display cannot be started. Even if the detection state of the detecting means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the display for management is displayed, the display for management (for example, FIG. 13A) ( The gaming machine is characterized by continuing the management screen SD) shown in 4).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved. In addition, for example, even if an unauthorized person performs a predetermined operation to open the door while the detection state of the detection means remains in the closed detection state, the management display cannot be confirmed, thereby improving security. can be achieved. Further, after the display for management is displayed, the display for management is continued even if the door opening sensor is in the closing detection state, thereby providing a game machine that is easy to use for the game clerk. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a second stop mode (for example, a replay role). The display of the management display may be configured not to start when the game is stopped at (symbol combination corresponding to (replay)).

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. Security can be improved by disabling the display of

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 2 of management screen>
Next, display example 2 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 13(B)(1) to 13(B)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode described using FIGS. 12(B)(1) to 12(B)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the game parlor. , the management screen SD has started to be displayed. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Management screen display example 2/Power status: Power ON → Power OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 13(B)(4) is the state where the power supply state shown in FIG. This is a state in which the power has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output, and the display means (liquid crystal display device) 157) is hidden.

<Management screen display example 2/setting key SW: ON→OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 13(B)(5) is the state shown in FIG. , and the setting key SW is turned off.

Since the power supply state is also OFF in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output, and the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is turned off. ) are hidden.

<Management screen display example 2/Power status: Power OFF → Power ON>
The states shown in FIGS. 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B and 13B is the power OFF state, respectively, and the power SW is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade, and the power state changes to the power state. This is a state in which the power has changed from OFF to ON.

The slot machine 100 turns off the power while the management screen SD (management display) is displayed, and then turns the setting key SW from ON to OFF (cancels a certain operation) to turn the power on. When set to , the management display is started to be displayed without performing the certain operation.

More specifically, the main control unit 300 determines that the state before the power failure in step S205 of the main control unit initial setting process described with reference to FIG. If no command has been sent, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation is sent to the first sub-controller 400. do.

When receiving this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13(B)(6), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW) capable of switching from OFF to ON by rotating, and a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate (for example, in FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel rotates. is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started. When the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(B)(3)) is displayed, the certain operation is canceled after the power is turned off. When the power is turned on, the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(B)(6)) starts to be displayed without performing the certain operation. It's a playground.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved. In addition, if the management display is not correctly terminated, even if the power is turned on, the management display is displayed, thereby making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the game clerk.

In addition, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a second stop mode (for example, a replay role). The display of the management display may be configured not to start when the game is stopped at (symbol combination corresponding to (replay)).

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. Security can be improved by disabling the display of

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 3 of management screen>
Next, display example 3 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 3 of the management screen in chronological order.

<Management screen display example 3/reel operation status: in operation>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel operation state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating). state).

In this state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a game light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs and displays the game BGM. In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), an effect during the game is displayed.

<Management screen display example 3/front door: door closed → door open>
14A and 14B, the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 moves from the door closed state to the door closed state described with reference to FIG. 14A(1). It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 42
0, etc.) is emitted in an open light emission mode, and an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), while the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 continues the effect during the game.

<Management screen display example 3/Turn ON the setting key SW during reel rotation>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(3) is that the reel operation state shown in FIG. This is a state in which the administrator has performed an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW has been turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is in a state in which the front door 102 (door body) is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, the state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) is not entered, and the management screen (management display) is displayed. Configured to never start showing.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the subsequent step S604.

In this example, since one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and it is not the set value confirmation effective period, the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent step S604 is not executed. No setting value is displayed in 101a. In addition, since the processing of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, so the display as shown in FIG. 14(A)(3) In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the effect during the game is continued.

<Management screen display example 3/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B is that the reel operation state shown in FIG. A third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the administrator, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, a small winning combination (Bell) is internally won, and a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. A combination (in this example, a “Bell-Bell-Bell” pattern combination) is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. (Bell) A prize-winning notification display ND1 (in this example, a display of a bell pattern image and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that the player has won a prize.

In the state shown in FIG. 14(A)(4), since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speaker 272 , 277) outputs an opening sound, but the present invention is not limited to this. The means (speakers 272, 277) may output a winning notification sound suggesting that a winning combination has been won (the same applies to other embodiments).

<Management screen display example 3/Management screen display>
The state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14(5) is a state in which the display of the management screen SD is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 14(A) and (4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state in which an operation (a certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are set in a first stop mode (in this example, When stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell), it is configured to start displaying the management screen SD (management display),
More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation effective period and the setting key SW is ON, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current setting value.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting display of the management screen is executed. As a result, the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), as shown in FIGS.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW) capable of switching from OFF to ON by rotating, and a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate (for example, in FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel rotates. is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the management display (for example, the figure 14(A)(5), the gaming machine is configured to start displaying a management screen (SD) shown in (5).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved.

The first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, the sound output means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2) and the second operation means (for example, the cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1) are provided, and the operation by the second operation means is performed. and the display means displays a volume value ( For example, the volume value display VD2) shown in FIG. 18(B)(2) can be displayed. It may be configured such that the volume output from the sound output means cannot be changed even if the second operation means is operated (see, for example, FIG. 18(B)(3)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the volume value display even while the display for management is being displayed, and the convenience of the manager of the game parlor can be improved.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position where the door body can be operated in either the open state or the closed state.

With such a configuration, not only the manager of the game parlor but also the player can adjust the volume, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

<Display example 4 of management screen>
Next, display example 4 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 14(B)(1) to 14(B)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode described using FIGS. 14(A)(1) to 14(A)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the manager of the game parlor. However, since the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (the reel operating state is operating), the management screen SD is not displayed. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Management screen display example 4/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 14(B)(4) is that the reel operation state shown in FIG. A third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the administrator, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) is internally won, and the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. (in this example, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay") is displayed, the replay state is entered, and the display means (liquid crystal In the display area of the display device 157), a winning notification display ND2 (in this example, an image of a replay symbol and a character string "GET!!") indicating that a replay has been won is displayed. are doing.

<Management screen display example 4/Hide management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 14(B)(5) is the state after winning of the replay combination explained with reference to FIG. 14(A)(4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state in which an operation (a certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are set to the second stop mode (in this example, When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role (replay) is stopped, the display of the management screen SD (management display) is configured not to start.
More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is a replay state (MAX bet state) due to replay, and it is not the set value confirmation effective period, the set value confirmation process is terminated, and the subsequent step S604 is not executed, so the set value display device No setting value is displayed in 101a. In addition, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. As shown in 14(B)(5), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the in-game effect is continued.

According to this example, in the first state (the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state), the reel is rotating, and a certain operation is being performed. , when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (replay) in this example) by the stop button, the management display is not started to be displayed. Therefore, even if the reels are in the stopped state, if the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it becomes a max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display cannot be started. By doing so, security can be improved.

<Error notification display example 1>
Next, a display example 1 of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 15(A). FIG. 15A is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 1 in chronological order.

<Error notification display example 1/reel operating status: operating (error non-detected status)>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel operation state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating). state) and error non-detection state.

In this state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a game light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs and displays the game BGM. In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), an effect during the game is displayed.

<Error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating (error detection status)>
In the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2), an error occurs in the reel operating state shown in FIG. state.

The slot machine 100 is in a state in which the front door 102 (door body) is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, when it is determined that the setting is not being changed, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating), and each error is not being notified, in the following step S704, the error notification start process to run.

The state shown in FIG. 15 (A) (2) is a state in which the reel operating state is in operation (a state in which at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating) and is not an error reporting possible period, so other devices The monitoring process is ended, and the in-game effect is continued as shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) without starting the error notification.

<Error notification display example 3/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
In the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(3), when the reel operation state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) is in operation (error detection state), a third stop operation (stop operation) is is performed and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, a small winning combination (Bell) is internally won, and a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. A combination (in this example, a “Bell-Bell-Bell” pattern combination) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. (Bell) A prize-winning notification display ND1 (in this example, a display of a bell pattern image and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that the player has won a prize.

In addition, the luminous body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a bell emission mode that suggests that a small winning combination (bell) has been won, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) has won a small winning combination (bell). Outputs a suggestive bell sound effect.

<Error notification display example 1/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 15(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state in which a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) cause the plurality of reels 110 to 112 to stop in the first stop mode (this In the example, when it is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell), it is configured to start displaying an error notification ER (error display),
More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and each error is not being notified, the error notification is started in the following step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The first sub-control section 400 sends the error command is received from the main control unit 300, processing for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15(A)(4), an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "selector error has occurred!") is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). , and the display of the character string "Please call the game clerk.") is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk" from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). ”) is output.

In addition, the mode of error notification is not limited to this example. , By executing a second error notification that can identify the error content (for example, displaying a character string "Selector error has occurred!"), the error content may be notified step by step. .

Also, as shown in FIG. 15(A)(2'), when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state). When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, a special error notification (error display) is started to be displayed. can be configured to Further, in this case, even if there is an operation (error cancellation operation) by the reset switch while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, the error may not be canceled.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW) capable of switching from OFF to ON by rotating, and a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate (for example, in FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel rotates. is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started. When an error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the reel is stopped, an error display related to the error is displayed. In the first state where the reel is rotating, even if the certain error is detected, the display of the error display is not started. , the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain error is detected, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in the first stop mode (for example, a small win (bell ), the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 15 (A) (4)) is started to be displayed. It's a playground.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during a game (for example, while reels are spinning or medals are being bet), cheating is performed. Since there is a possibility that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even if the door is in an open state, security can be improved. In addition, even if an error occurs during the game (for example, while the reel is spinning or medals are being bet), the error notification is not started, and when the game is stopped, the error notification is started immediately, thereby improving security. can be improved.

In addition, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a second stop mode (for example, a replay role). The display of the management display may be configured not to start when the game is stopped at (symbol combination corresponding to (replay)).

With such a configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because of the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. Security can be improved by disabling the display of

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Error notification display example 2>
Next, a display example 2 of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 15(B). FIG. 15B is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 2 in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 15(B)(1) to 15(B)(2) are the same states as the error detection states described using FIGS. 15(A)(1) to 15(A)(2). This is a state in which an error occurs when the reel operation state is in operation (error non-detected state), and the error is detected. A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Error notification display example 2/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
In the state shown in FIG. 15(B)(3), when the reel operation state shown in FIG. 15(B)(2) is in operation (error detection state), a third stop operation (stop operation) is is performed and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) is internally won, and the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed.
(in this example, the symbol combination of "Replay-Replay-Replay") is displayed, and as shown in FIG. , a prize-winning notification display ND2 (in this example, a display of a replay pattern image and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that a replay combination (replay) has been won.

In addition, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a replay light emission mode that suggests that the replay role (replay) has been won, and from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) to the replay role (replay) Outputs a replay sound effect suggesting that the player has won a prize.

<Error notification display example 2/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4) is the state where the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the replay combination (replay) explained with reference to FIG. 15(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state in which a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are set to the second stop mode (this In the example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped, the display of the error notification ER (error display) is started.
More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and each error is not being notified, the error notification is started in the following step S704. do.

The state shown in FIG. 15(B)(4) is a replay state by replay, but since it is also an error notification possible period, the main control unit 300 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The first sub-control section 400 sends the error command is received from the main control unit 300, processing for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15(A)(4), an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "selector error has occurred!") is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). , and the display of the character string "Please call the game clerk.") is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk" from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). ”) is output.

According to this example, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to switch to the second stop mode (replay in this example). When the symbol combination corresponding to the combination (replay) is stopped, the management display does not start to be displayed, but an error display is started. Even if an error occurs in the betting state), if the game is stopped without starting the error notification, the error notification is started immediately regardless of the stop state of the reels, thereby improving security. can.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen and the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 16(A). FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating (error detection status)>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(1) is when the reel operation state is in operation, the front door 102 is in the open state, the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the error is detected state, and the setting key SW is pressed by the manager of the amusement arcade. is turned ON from OFF (some operation), and the setting key SW is turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is in a state in which the front door 102 (door body) is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if an operation (some operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed, the state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) is not entered, and the management screen (management display) is displayed. Configured to never start showing.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the subsequent step S604.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(A)(1), one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and the set value confirmation valid period is not reached, so the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent step S604 is executed. Since it is not executed, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Also, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, so that the display as shown in FIG. 16(A)(1) In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the effect during the game is continued.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 rotate. In this state, even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification ER (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, when it is determined that the setting is not being changed, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating), and each error is not being notified, in the following step S704, the error notification start process to run.

The state shown in FIG. 16 (A) (1) is a state in which the reel operation state is in operation (a state in which at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating), and is not an error notification possible period, so other devices The performance during the game is continued without ending the monitoring process and starting the error notification.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/reel operation status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(2) corresponds to the reel operating state shown in FIG. 16(A)(1) during operation (
In the error detection state), a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the administrator of the amusement arcade, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, a small winning combination (Bell) is internally won, and a third stop operation (stop operation) is performed. A combination (in this example, a “Bell-Bell-Bell” pattern combination) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. (Bell) A prize-winning notification display ND1 (in this example, a display of a bell pattern image and a character string "GET!!") is displayed to suggest that the player has won a prize.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(3) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small combination (bell) described with reference to FIG. 16(A)(2).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or operation is being performed), and a state (second state) in which an error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) to stop the plurality of reels 110 to 112, the display of the management screen SD (management display) does not start, but the display of the error notification ER (error display) starts.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and each error is not being notified, the error notification is started in the following step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 16(A)(3) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The first sub-control section 400 sends the error command is received from the main control unit 300, processing for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(A)(3), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the error notification ER (in this example, the character string "selector error has occurred!"). , and the display of the character string "Please call the game clerk.") is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk" from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). ”) is output.

<Management screen and error notification display example 1/Error detected state → Error not detected state>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(4) is a state in which the error detection state shown in FIG. 16(A)(3) has changed to the error non-detection state.

In this state, after the medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) has been resolved and the error detection state has changed to the error non-detection state, the error cancellation operation is performed by the reset SW.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.)
is emitted in the open light emission mode, and an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277), and since the error detection state has changed to the error non-detection state, the display of the preparing screen is started.

More specifically, after determining that the error notification end condition is met in step S706 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. If it is determined that there is, in step S709, a preparation screen display command for instructing start of display of the preparation screen is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main controller 300, the first sub-controller 400 displays the preparation screen until it becomes possible to display the management screen, or it is possible to display the management screen. Even if it is, for a predetermined period of time, the process of displaying the screen during preparation, etc. is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16(A)(4), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, after the error notification ER is terminated, the display of the management display SD is being prepared. The display of the screen (in this example, the display of the character string "Preparing display for management") is started. Note that the screen before displaying the management screen SD is not limited to this example, and may be the same screen as part of the in-game effect, or the same screen as part of the in-stop effect, for example. good too.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(5) is a state in which an error cancellation operation is performed by the reset SW after the error non-detected state shown in FIG. 16(A)(4), and the display of the management screen is started. .

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or operation is being performed), and a state (second state) in which an error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) stops a plurality of reels, starts displaying an error notification ER (error display), and enters a state where a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) has not been detected. When the reset SW (second operating means) is operated later, the display of the error notification ER (error display) and the preparation screen is terminated, and the display of the management screen SD (management display) is started. It is configured.

More specifically, in steps S602 and S603 of the set value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. It is not a state in which the number of medals (three in this example) is betted, or a replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the error is not being reported and the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the subsequent step S604.

In this example, since it is the setting value confirmation effective period and the setting key SW is ON, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current setting value.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16(5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As shown in FIG. 16(A)(4'), even if the error detection state is the error non-detection state, if the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the closed detection state, the reset Even if an operation (error cancellation operation) is performed by SW (second operation means), the error cannot be canceled and the error notification ER may be continued.

Further, when the management screen SD is displayed during the display of the number of payouts, the display of the number of payouts may be terminated. Further, even if a certain error occurs while the management screen SD is being displayed, it may be configured so as not to perform the error notification of the occurrence of the error.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW) capable of switching from OFF to ON by rotating, and a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate (for example, in FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and in the first state, the reel rotates. Even if the certain operation is performed in the state where the reel is stopped, a certain error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (Medal Selector Error)) is detected, it is configured to be able to start displaying an error display related to the certain error, and in the first state and in a state in which the reel is rotating, the or the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, the state in which the certain operation is being performed, and When the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in the state where the certain error is detected (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), the display of the management display is not started, but the The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to start displaying an error display (for example, an error notification ER shown in FIG. 16(A)(3)).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped, the error display is given priority over the management display, thereby improving security.

A second operation means (for example, a reset switch) is provided, and in the second state, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button, the error display is started, and the certain error is detected. When an operation is performed by the second operation means after the state of not being displayed, the display of the error display is ended, and the management display (for example, the administrator screen shown in FIG. 16 (A) (5) SD) may be configured to start displaying.

With such a configuration, by canceling the error and displaying the display for management after the end of the error display, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the game clerk.

Further, when an operation is performed by the second operation means, the display of the error display is terminated, and the display of the management display is started, a certain display ( For example, it may be configured to start displaying the screen during preparation shown in FIG. 16(A)(4).

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the second operation means has been accepted, and convenience for the manager of the gaming parlor can be enhanced.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts, etc., since only the manager of the game parlor can operate the second operating means.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification>
Next, a display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 16(B). FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and the error notification in chronological order.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Turn on the setting key SW when the power is turned off>
The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(1) is the state where the power supply is OFF, the front door 102 is in the open state, the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the error detection state is performed. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed to turn from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW has been turned ON.

In this state, an error is detected, but since the power state is power OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output. , the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is non-display.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/starting setting change mode, display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(2) is the state in which the setting key SW is ON, as described with reference to FIG. This is a state in which the power state has changed from power OFF to power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on in a state in which the setting key SW is turned ON from OFF. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode), and a setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277).

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 16(B)(2), since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. When the power is turned on in a state where (a certain operation) is being performed and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state), The display of the error notification ER (error display) is not started, but the display of the management screen (management display) is started.

More specifically, in steps S203 and S204 of the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 7 is started. In this example, the setting change process is started because the front door 102 is open and the setting key SW is ON.

Subsequently, in step S302 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start changing the setting to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 16B(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Subsequently, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current set values using the set value display device 101a.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Set value>
The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(3) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the administrator of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, in subsequent steps S308 and S309, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is changed. , is stored (confirmed) as a new set value, and the display of the set value display device 101a is erased to hide the set value.

<Management screen and error notification display example 2/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after the set values shown in FIG. 16(B)(3) are determined.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), and the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or operation) is being performed, and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state), the start lever 135 is operated. After that, when the operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is released, the display of the management screen (management display) is terminated and the display of the error notification ER (error display) is started. is configured to

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and each error is not being notified, the error notification is started in the following step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 16(B)(4) is the error notification enabled period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The first sub-control section 400 sends the error command is received from the main control unit 300, processing for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(B)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the error notification ER (in this example, the character string "selector error has occurred!"). , and the display of the character string "Please call the game clerk.") is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk" from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). ”) is output.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation (for example, a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW) capable of switching from OFF to ON by rotating, and a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate (for example, in FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a game provided with a platform, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; means for enabling a detection state to become an open detection state; said display means being means for displaying a management display for an administrator; , “first state”.), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started, and a certain error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error )) is detected, the first state, the state in which the certain operation is being performed, and the certain error are detected. When the power is turned on in this state (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the display of the error display does not start, but the management display (for example, shown in FIG. 16(B)(2)) The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to start displaying a screen for administrator (SD).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the management display is given priority over the error display, thereby providing a user-friendly amusement machine for the manager of the amusement parlor. .

In addition, a start lever (for example, start lever 135) is provided, and when the certain operation is canceled after the start lever is operated in the second state, the display of the management display is terminated, It may be configured to start the display of the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 16(B)(4)).

With such a configuration, after the start lever is operated, the management screen can be terminated and the error display can be started, so that the occurrence of the error can be reliably notified.

Further, a second operating means (for example, a reset switch) is provided so that when the detection state of the detecting means is the closed detection state, the error cannot be cleared even if the second operating means is operated. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions such as forcibly canceling the error state, thereby improving security.

Further, the first operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the manager of the game parlor can operate the first operating means, so that fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Further, the second operation means may be means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts, etc., since only the manager of the game parlor can operate the second operating means.

<Display of setting history>
Next, the display of the setting history will be described with reference to FIG. 17(A). FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the flow of setting history display in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 17(A)(1) to 17(A)(2) are the same states as the setting change modes described using FIGS. 12(A)(1) to 12(A)(2). This is a state in which the power is turned on in a state in which the operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON has been performed, and the state has shifted to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode). A detailed description of the same state is omitted to avoid redundant description.

<Specific operations in setting history display/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(3) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting change mode and display of the setting history has started.

The display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 provides a history display (in this example, the setting history SH) can be displayed, and when the first event (setting value confirmation due to setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the first event (setting change In a certain state (setting change mode) in which setting value confirmation has occurred, it is possible to display a history display (setting history SH) relating to the first event (setting value confirmation due to setting change) that occurred in the past.

In this example, the setting shown in FIG. Display history SH.

Although the display mode of the setting history SH is not particularly limited, in this example, the date and time when the setting change (or setting confirmation) was performed, the set value set (or confirmed) by the setting change (or setting confirmation), and the operation details. (setting change or setting confirmation) can be displayed in chronological order. (No. 2) Setting change/confirmation date and time: MM/DD/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM of MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM/MM to display (in reverse chronological (or chronological) order).

According to this example, it is possible to easily check the setting values and the like set in the past by the manager of the game parlor. Also, even if it is displayed by an illegal operation to the player, it is less likely to be used for fraud because the history display is not for the event that occurred this time, but for the event that occurred in the past.

<Confirmation of setting values in setting history display/setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the amusement arcade in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, in subsequent steps S308 and S309, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is changed. , is stored (confirmed) as a new setting value (here, setting 5), the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased, and the setting value is hidden.

In addition, the slot machine 100, when a first event (set value confirmation due to setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the first event (setting value change due to setting change) occurs. In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting change has occurred, it is not possible to display the history (setting history SH) related to the first event (set value confirmation by setting change) that has occurred this time.

According to this example, since the history of setting values due to the current setting change (the history display of the first event that occurred this time) is not displayed, for example, if the player illegally performs a setting change operation, the setting change It is possible to improve security by not being able to easily confirm whether or not the procedure has been performed correctly.

In the state shown in FIG. 17(A)(4), the setting key is kept ON, so the display of the setting history SH continues. In the example, the date and time when the setting was changed, the set value set by the setting change, and the content of the operation (setting change) are not displayed.

In addition, the slot machine 100, when a first event (set value confirmation due to setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the first event (setting value change due to setting change) occurs. In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting change has occurred, it is possible to erase at least a part of the history display (setting history SH) related to the first event (set value confirmation by setting change) that occurred in the past. On the other hand, the history display (setting history SH) relating to the first event (set value confirmation by setting change) that occurred this time cannot be erased.

Specifically, when the cross button 193 is operated to select and press the "delete history" button located below the setting history SH, at least a part of the past setting history SH (in this example, , only the setting history SH being displayed) are deleted.

According to this example, it is not possible to clear (delete) the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of setting values resulting from this setting change). security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of setting values due to this setting change), it is necessary to move to a certain state again, so the risk is high for the unauthorized person. Unauthorized acts can be prevented.

<Displaying the setting history/Exiting the setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

When determining that the setting key SW is OFF in step S310 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting change end command from the main controller 300, it executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17(5), the setting history SH of the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. . In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

<Displaying the setting history/starting the setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B is the state where the front door 102 shown in FIG. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed to turn from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW has been turned ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed.

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state). When an operation (a certain operation) is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started, and the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). However, in this example, since the setting history item was selected on the most recent management screen SD, as shown in FIG. Display SH.

In this example, since the setting value was changed to setting 5 in the most recent setting change mode (FIG. 17 (A) (4)), the first event that occurred in the past (setting value change ) as a history display corresponding to "(No. 3) setting change/confirmation date and time: XX year XX day XX hour XX minute XX seconds, setting value: 5, operation: change" and this setting confirmation mode As a history display corresponding to the confirmation of the setting value in , "(No. 4) Setting change/confirmation date and time: 0/0/0/0/0:00:00 seconds, setting value: 5, operation: confirmation" The history display is additionally displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to easily check the setting values and the like set in the past by the manager of the game parlor.

<Display error history>
Next, the error history display will be described with reference to FIG. 17(B). FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order.

<Display error history/start setting confirmation mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 17(B)(1), the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed to turn on the setting key SW.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when an operation is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is on. Then, in the same state, the state shifts to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed.

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state). Since the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started when an operation (a certain operation) is performed, as shown in FIG. A management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display device 157).

<Specific operations in error history display/setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17B(2) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting confirmation mode and display of the error history has started.

The display means (liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 displays a history display (error history EH in this example) showing the history of occurrence of the second event (door opening or door closing in this example). It is possible, and when a second event (door opening or door closing) occurs in a certain state (setting confirmation mode in this example), a certain In the state (setting confirmation mode), it is possible to display a history display (error history EH) relating to first events (door opening and door closing) that occurred this time and in the past.

More specifically, in step S502 of the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 9, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating an open detection state, the main control unit 300 detects that the front door 102 has been opened. In addition, the door open detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the door open detection command. is received from the main control unit 300, the opening detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating “open” and the date and time of opening) is stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information. , and performs door open notification.

On the other hand, in step S502 of the device monitoring process, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating an open detection state, the main control unit 300 stores closure detection information indicating detection of closure of the front door 102 in the RAM 308. A door closure detection command indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, and when the first sub-controller 400 receives this door closure detection command from the main controller 300, Closure detection information indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "closed" and date and time of closure) is stored in the RAM 408 as historical information in chronological order.

In this example, when the error history item is selected from the menu display of the management screen SD by a specific operation (operation using the cross button 193), open detection information (information indicating “open” and open date and time) and closure detection information (information indicating "closed" and date and time of closure) are acquired from the RAM 408, and as shown in FIG. , the current and past error history EH is displayed.

The display mode of the error history EH is not particularly limited, but in this example, the date and time of error occurrence and the details of the error that occurred can be displayed in chronological order. _______________ error occurred: Selector error, (No.2) Date and time of error occurrence: ___________________________, Error occurred: Door open, (No.3) Date and time of error occurrence: __________ 〇Day 〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇 on the door closed, (No.4) Date and time of error occurrence: 〇〇月〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇 on 〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇, Occurred in the past and this time. Display items related to errors that occurred in chronological order (in chronological order (newest (or oldest))).

<Error history display/Front door: Door open → Door closed>
In the state shown in FIG. 17B(3), the front door 102 is closed in the door body open state shown in FIG. It is in a state of

Even if the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the error history EH (display for management) is displayed, the slot machine 100 displays the error history EH. (Management Display) is configured to be displayed continuously. In this example, since the setting value is being checked and the setting key SW is ON, the display of the error history EH is continued. Also, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) that emit light in the open state are turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that output the opening sound is set to non-output. .

In addition, since the front door 102 has changed from the door body open state to the door body closed state, the history display corresponding to the first event (door open error) that occurred this time is displayed in the error history EH as "(No. 5) error Occurrence date and time: XX, XX, XX, XX, XX (the date and time when the closure of the front door 102 was detected), Occurrence error: door closed” is additionally displayed.

According to this example, since the history of the opening and closing of the door can be displayed, it is possible to check the presence or absence of fraudulent acts and the past work status, etc., thereby enhancing the convenience of the manager of the amusement arcade. can be done.

<Displaying the error history/Exiting the setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17(B)(4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by an operation to turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the manager of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

When determining that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation end command indicating to end the setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, when the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-controller 400 executes the process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(B)(4), the error history EH displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, an effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal effect.

As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) is a game machine equipped with display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). Then, the display means displays a history (for example, the setting history SH shown in FIG. 17(A)(3)) showing the history of the occurrence of the first event (for example, setting value confirmation due to setting change). Display is possible, and the display means displays a history (for example, error history EH shown in FIG. 17B (2)) showing a history of the occurrence of a second event (for example, door opening or door closing) can be displayed, and when the second event occurs in a certain state, in the certain state in which the second event occurred, display the history display related to the second event that occurred this time When the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, the history display related to the first event that occurred this time is not displayed. It is a game machine characterized in that it is possible.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the history display (history of set values due to the setting change of this time) regarding the first event that occurred this time is not displayed, for example, if the player has illegally changed the setting In this case, it is possible to improve security by not being able to easily confirm whether or not the setting has been changed correctly.

Further, when the second event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the second event occurred, the history display regarding the second event that occurred in the past can be displayed. and when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, the history display regarding the first event that occurred in the past can be displayed. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily check the setting values set in the past by the administrator of the game parlor, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the management of the amusement parlor. Also, even if it is displayed by a player through an illegal operation, it is less likely to be used for illegal acts because it is a history display of events that occurred in the past.

Further, when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, at least part of the history related to the first event that occurred in the past While erasable, the history relating to the first event that occurred this time may not be erasable.

With such a configuration, the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of set values due to the setting change this time) cannot be cleared, so if the setting is changed illegally, the evidence of the illegal act can be destroyed. is difficult, and security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of setting values due to this setting change), it is necessary to move to a certain state again, so the risk is high for the unauthorized person. Unauthorized acts can be prevented.

Further, an operation means may be provided, and the first event may be that an operation for confirming a set value is performed by the operation means.

With such a configuration, even if an operation to confirm the setting value is performed, the setting value confirmed by the operation is not displayed. In addition, since it is not possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting has been changed correctly, it is possible to improve security.

In addition, a door (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and that can be opened and closed, and a detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door are provided. The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in a closed state, and the second event is a detection state in which the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state. state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to display the history of the opening and closing of the door body, so that it is possible to check the presence or absence of fraudulent acts and the past work status, etc., which improves the convenience of the manager of the game parlor. can be enhanced.

<Volume adjustment>
Next, volume adjustment will be described with reference to FIG.

<When the volume adjustment/management screen is not displayed>
FIG. 18A is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed.

FIG. 18(A)(1) shows that the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is closed, and the opening/closing sensor is detecting closure, and the stop effect is being executed, and the management screen is not displayed. state.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop light emission mode, and the stop BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), In the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), an effect during stop is displayed. In this example, the BGM during stop is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example).

FIG. 18(A)(2) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD is not displayed.

In the same state, in a state where the volume value display VD is not displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or Triggered by reception of a right button operation), the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started to be displayed, while the volume is not increased.

In this example, the increase in volume has been described, but the decrease in volume is similarly performed by decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) when the volume value display VD is not displayed. Triggered by the acceptance of the volume reduction operation (in this example, operation by the down button or left button of the cross button 193) for It is configured so that the volume is not decreased while the sound is started.

FIG. 18(A)(3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 18(A)(2) is displayed.

In the same state, when the volume value display VD is displayed, the volume is increased by one step when a volume increase operation (in this example, operation by the up button or the right button of the cross button 193) is accepted. A volume value display VD indicating the increased volume value (in this example, volume 5) is displayed, and the stop BGM is output at the increased volume value (in this example, volume 5).

In this example, increasing the volume has been described, but similarly, decreasing the volume is performed by performing a volume decrease operation (in this example, an operation using the down button or the left button of the cross button 193 in a state where the volume value display VD is displayed). ) is received, the volume is decreased by one step, and the volume value display VD indicating the volume value after the decrease (volume 3 in this example) is displayed, and the volume value after the decrease (volume 3 in this example) is displayed. , BGM during stop is output at volume 3).

As an operating means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, an administrator volume control SW may be provided. ), in the state where the volume value display VD is displayed, if a volume increase operation or a volume decrease operation is performed by the administrator volume adjustment SW, the volume may be adjusted. A volume value display VD may be displayed to indicate the volume value of .

<When the volume adjustment/management screen is displayed>
FIG. 18B is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in time series when the management screen is displayed.

In FIG. 18B(1), the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is ON, and the management screen SD is displayed. is in a state of

In this state, since the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound, and the liquid crystal A management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display device 157, and in this example, an opening sound is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example).

Note that the opening sound and error sound may be output at a predetermined volume (for example, maximum volume) regardless of the set volume value.

FIG. 18(B)(2) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 is not displayed.

In this state, in a state where the volume value display VD2 is not displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button or Triggered by reception of a right button operation), the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started to be displayed, while the volume is not increased.

In this example, the increase in volume has been explained, but the decrease in volume is also similar to that for decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) when the volume value display VD is not displayed. Triggered by acceptance of a volume reduction operation (in this example, operation by the down button or left button of the cross button 193), the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started. On the other hand, it is configured not to decrease the volume.

FIG. 18(B)(3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 18(B)(2) is displayed.

In this state, when the volume value display VD2 is displayed, the volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button or Right button operation) is accepted, but since the management screen SD is being displayed, the volume is not increased, and the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is displayed. continue to display.

In this example, the increase in volume has been explained, but the decrease in volume is also similar to that for decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) in the state where the volume value display VD2 is displayed. Even when a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation with the down button or left button of the cross button 193) is received, the volume is not reduced because the management screen SD is being displayed. The volume value display VD indicating the volume value (volume 4 in this example) continues to be displayed.

As an operation means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, an administrator volume control SW may be provided. ), in the state where the volume value display VD is displayed, if a volume increase operation or a volume decrease operation is performed by the administrator volume adjustment SW, the volume may be adjusted. A volume value display VD that indicates the volume value of is displayed.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the game state of the AT system will be described. FIG. 19 is a simple game flow showing an AT game state.

First, the game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. A low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, a normal section, or a normal state. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation-navigation is executed is higher than in the low-navigation state (a state that is more advantageous than the low-navigation state (normal state) in terms of operation-navigation (notification of operation information)). It is also called an advantageous section or an advantageous state.

Here, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies operation information (for example, correct operation order and stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (operation means) in order to obtain medals and maintain an advantageous gaming state. No, for example, an effect for notifying the correct operation order of the winning combination (for example, an effect for displaying the characters “left→middle→right”) is applicable.

When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, the result is advantageous to the player, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine relative to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It means that the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate) is advantageous. In addition, the stock time and the CZ state are easier to shift to the CZ state and the AT state than the normal stage, so it can be said that the stock time and the CZ state are more advantageous than the normal stage.

In this example, the low navigation state is a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The non-execution state and high-navigation state may be set to the state in which operation navigation is executed.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. In this example, the production state of the low navigation state has a special stage, and the production state of the high navigation state is stock time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ST"), normal stage, CZ state (compared to the normal stage state), and the AT state. Among these production states, the AT state is, in principle, a state in which the number of balls to be paid out increases. Note that the effect state is not limited to this example, and for example, the high-navigation state may include other effect states such as a confirmation notification state, a pullback state, and the like.

In this embodiment, in the special stage of the low navigation state (normal section), if the condition (A) is established (in this example, if you win a winning combination other than losing), the high navigation state (advantageous section) Transition to stock time. It should be noted that after the RAM is cleared such as when the setting is changed, if the condition (A) is satisfied, it may be configured so as to shift to the stock time, or it may be configured not to shift.

Stock time (first game state) is a state in which a CZ lottery that can acquire the right to shift to the CZ state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "CZ") or one or more CZ stocks is possible. .

In this stock time, even if the CZ lottery is won, the CZ state obtained by the CZ lottery will not be changed until the specified number of games in the stock time (first period. In this example, 50 games) has passed. Stock (accumulate).

Then, when the condition (B) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time specified number of games (50 games in this example) has passed without stocking CZ), the stage shifts to the normal stage, When the condition (C) is established (in this example, when the number of stock time specified games (50 games in this example) has passed while CZ is stocked), the state shifts to the CZ state. It should be noted that the transition destination when the condition (C) is satisfied in the stock time is not limited to the CZ state.

Note that the conditions (B) and (C) for ending the stock time are not limited to this example, and may be less or more than 50 games.

According to this example, even if the CZ lottery is won (even if certain conditions are met), the CZ state (second gaming state) is maintained until the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) is completed. Since there is no shift, the game can be enjoyed over a long period of time in the number of games specified in the stock time (first period), and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, when moving from a normal section to an advantageous section, until the number of games specified in the stock time has passed, there is no transition to the CZ state or AT state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which too many balls come out in a short time and the gambling property becomes higher than necessary when the next advantageous section is reached after passing through the section.

The normal stage has various performance stages, and is a state in which a CZ lottery that can acquire the right (CZ) to shift to the CZ state is possible.

In this normal stage, when the condition (D) is established (in this example, when the CZ is won), the CZ is not stocked, and the state is immediately shifted to the CZ state.

The CZ state (second game state) is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (special stage) in the low navigation state (normal section) or the normal stage in the high navigation state (advantageous section). (For example, it is easier to shift to AT state when winning a rare role in the CZ state than when winning a rare role in a normal stage, etc.) In this example, the weak CZ state (third game state) And, there are a strong CZ state (fourth game state) and an AT fixed CZ state (fourth game state). The strong CZ state is a state in which transition to the AT state is more likely than in the weak CZ state, and the AT determined CZ state is a state in which the AT state always transitions after the CZ state ends.

In the CZ state, when the condition (E) is satisfied (in this example, when the CZ predetermined number of games (9 games in this example) have passed without winning the AT in the CZ state), the normal stage is entered, When the condition (F) is established (in this example, when AT is won in the CZ state and a predetermined number of CZ games (9 games in this example) have passed), the state is shifted to the AT state.

It should be noted that conditions (E) and conditions (F), which are conditions for ending the CZ state, are not limited to this example, and may be less than or greater than 9 games. Number of games preferred. In addition, the CZ state may be ended by winning a specified number of specific winning combinations, or if the AT state is won, the state may be shifted to the AT state before the predetermined number of games has passed (CZ state may be terminated).

AT state is a state in which it is possible to play AT games for a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 set 30 games). This is an advantageous state for the player, and in this example, the normal AT, the AT addition state in which an additional lottery for the AT game is executed, and the ED state in which an ED (ending) effect indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed. There is

Also, in this AT state, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed as to whether or not to continue the AT game, and when this set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (in this example, (1 set of 30 games) AT games are given, and the AT state is extended.

If the condition (G) is satisfied in this AT state (if the AT end condition is satisfied (in this example, if all games are completed in the AT state), or if the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (this example Now, when 1500 games have passed in the advantageous section, or when 2400 coins have been paid out in the advantageous section), the game shifts to a low navigation state (normal section) special stage.

It should be noted that the advantageous section end condition is an example, and may be the case where 3000 games have passed, or the case where 3000 coins have been paid out.

Also, in this example, the production state is the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section), but the production state may be the stock time or the normal stage even in the low navigation state (normal section). In other words, even in the low navigation state (normal section), if the production state is stock time (or / and normal stage), the stock time (or / and normal stage) is the period of low navigation state (normal section) There is a period of high navigation state (advantageous section). Conversely, the special stage may be continued even when the game transitions to a high navigation state (advantageous section).

<CZ lottery>
Next, the CZ lottery executed during the stock time and the normal stage will be described with reference to FIGS. 20(b) and (c).

The CZ lottery is a lottery in which the right (CZ) to move to the CZ state can be acquired. Cherry) is stop-displayed in the symbol display window 113, a CZ lottery using a CZ determination table, which will be described later, is executed.

The lottery mode of the CZ lottery includes a high-probability mode in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively high and a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively low. When moving to a normal stage or stock time, the low probability mode is set first, but if you win a winning role (for example, a rare role with a low winning probability) in each production state, the high probability mode is set. be done.

<CZ lottery / normal stage>
FIG. 20(b) is a diagram showing an example of the CZ determination table used for the CZ lottery in the normal stage. For convenience of explanation, only the CZ determination table to be referred to when the setting value is setting 1 will be exemplified, but for setting 2 to setting 6, it is preferable that the higher the setting value, the higher the winning probability of the CZ lottery. (The same applies to the stock time CZ determination table).

In the normal stage (low-probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 2% (the CZ is acquired), and the symbol corresponding to the watermelon is won. When the pattern combination is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 1% (CZ is acquired), and the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113. Then, when the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 6% (acquisition of CZ), and the pattern combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 27% ( CZ).

In addition, in the normal stage (high probability mode), when the pattern combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 13% (the CZ is obtained), and the watermelon is selected. When the corresponding pattern combination is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 7% (CZ is acquired), and the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113. 20% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ), and 34% probability of winning the CZ lottery when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113. (acquire CZ).

<CZ Lottery / Stock Time>
FIG. 20(c) is a diagram showing an example of the CZ determination table used for the CZ lottery during stock time.

In the stock time (low-probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 10% (the CZ is obtained), and the symbol corresponding to the watermelon is selected. When the pattern combination is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 5% (the CZ is obtained), and the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113. Then, the player wins the CZ lottery with a probability of 12% (obtains CZ), and when the pattern combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the pattern display window 113, he wins the CZ lottery with a probability of 30% ( CZ). In this example, even in the same low-probability mode, the stock time (low-probability mode) is easier to win the CZ lottery than the normal stage (low-probability mode) (CZ is easier to obtain).

Further, in the stock time (high probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 15% (the CZ is acquired), and the watermelon is won. When the corresponding pattern combination is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 11% (the CZ is acquired), and the pattern combination corresponding to the chance is stop-displayed in the pattern display window 113. , the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 40% (the CZ is acquired), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 100%. (acquire CZ). In this example, even in the same high-probability mode, the stock time (high-probability mode) is easier to win the CZ lottery than the normal stage (high-probability mode) (CZ is easier to obtain).

According to this example, it is possible to make the player feel anticipation for the advantageous section (high-probability mode) during the stock time (first period), and to increase the player's desire to play during the stock time (first period). can be done.

<Example of transition of production state in advantageous section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20(a), an example of transition of the effect state in the advantageous section will be described. FIG. 20(a) is a diagram showing an example of transition of the effect state in the advantageous section.

As described with reference to FIG. 19, in the special stage of the low navigation state (normal section), when winning a winning combination other than losing, the game shifts to the stock time of the high navigation state (advantageous section).

The transition condition to stock time is not limited to this example. For example, when the conditions for transition from low navigation state (normal section) to high navigation state (advantageous section) are met, the transition to stock time is guaranteed. Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the stock time, or it may be configured not to shift to the stock time after clearing the RAM such as setting changes. , and may be configured to shift to stock time only after the start of an advantageous section after AT or a bonus.

In the stock time, as shown in (a) (1) and (2) of FIG. 20, even if the CZ lottery is won, the state does not shift to the CZ state until the specified number of games in the stock time (50 games) has passed. CZ is stocked (accumulated), the precursor effect is executed for a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game in which the CZ lottery is won, and in the final game of the certain period, the CZ lottery is won. Make a CZ winning announcement suggesting that.

In this example, even if you win the CZ lottery during the stock time, the state does not shift to the CZ state until the specified number of games in the stock time (50 games) has passed. The period (the number of games) from the state to the transition to the CZ state is different.

On the other hand, in the normal stage, as shown in FIG. 20(a) (1), when the CZ lottery is won, the precursor effect is performed for a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game in which the CZ lottery was won. is executed, and in the final game of a certain period, after the CZ winning notice suggesting the winning of the CZ lottery is made, the state immediately shifts to the CZ state (weak CZ state) from the next game of the premonition performance. Therefore, in the normal stage, the period (the number of games) from winning the CZ lottery to transitioning to the CZ state is the same regardless of the timing of winning the CZ lottery.

In stock time, when the number of games specified in the stock time (50 games) has passed, if the CZ is not stocked, the normal stage will be entered, and if the CZ is stocked, of the CZ state, It shifts to one of the weak CZ state, strong CZ state, and AT determined CZ state.

In this example, when one CZ is stocked as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. It shifts to the AT confirmed CZ state. That is, when a plurality of CZs are stocked during the stock time, the state shifts to a strong CZ state or an AT determined CZ state that is more advantageous to the player than a weak CZ state.

According to this example, a new game feature is provided, such as how many times the CZ lottery is won (how many times a certain condition is satisfied) before the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) ends. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even after winning the CZ lottery (after a certain condition is established), the sense of expectation can be maintained without impairing the playability. In addition, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming too high, and by winning the CZ lottery twice or more during the number of games specified in the stock time (first period) (a certain condition is established for the second number ), it is possible to transition to a strong CZ state (fourth game state) or an AT confirmed CZ state (fourth game state) that is more advantageous than a weak CZ state (third game state), so the player You can also moderately inflame the expectations of

Also, when the AT lottery is won in the CZ state shifted from the stock time, or when the stock time shifts to the AT fixed CZ, the AT game is shifted after the CZ state ends.

In addition, if you stock three or more CZs in stock time (if AT game is confirmed), even if the number of games specified in stock time (50 games) has not passed, it will immediately shift to AT confirmed CZ state. can be configured to Also, during stock time, in addition to the CZ lottery, an AT lottery (a lottery with a lower winning probability than the CZ lottery) will be held, and if you win the AT lottery, even if the number of games specified in the stock time (50 games) has not passed. , may be configured to immediately shift to the AT state.

In addition, in the final game of stock time, regardless of the presence or absence of CZ stock, a judgment effect may be executed to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state, and during stock time, the right to transition to the AT state (AT) may perform an obtainable AT lottery and stock AT instead of (or in addition to) CZ. In this case, depending on the stock number of AT (and/or CZ), transition after stock time You may decide the production state to do.

<Production example in stock time>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, an example of an effect during stock time will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in stock time in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the remaining number of games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 48 games.

In this state, a stock time background image (in this example, an image of the night sky including the moon) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 to indicate that the effect state is stock time, and the stock time (low probability mode), the number of remaining games (48G in this example) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 21(b) is a state in which the number of remaining games in the stock time (low-probability mode) is 47, and the CZ lottery is won.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (in this example, 47G) continue to be displayed. It has started to direct the omens to suggest.

The form of the sign effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the confrontation effect showing how the main character confronts the enemy samurai is displayed for a certain period of time (in this example, five games) from the game that won the CZ lottery. period).

Specifically, in the precursor effect of the first game shown in FIG. 21(b), a character string "Showdown!" In the precursor effect of the second game, the character image of the lord and the character string "It's a game!" are displayed, and in the subsequent precursor effect of the third game shown in FIG. Then, in the 4th game shown in (e) of the same figure, a confrontation scene between the lord and the enemy is displayed, and in the 5th game shown in (f) of the same figure, the lord wins over the enemy. A victory scene and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including a character string "CZ won!") for notifying that the player has won the CZ lottery are displayed.

In this example, when the CZ lottery is won, an example is shown in which the predictive effect is performed and the CZ winning notification is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CZ winning notification is not performed in the predictive effect. There may be cases, and it may be determined by lottery whether or not to perform CZ winning notification. In addition, there may be a case where the portent effect is not performed. Moreover, at least a part of the effect (for example, the background image for stock time) before the CZ winning notification is performed and the effect after the CZ winning notification may be different.

The state shown in FIG. 21(g) is a state in which the number of remaining games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 46 games.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (46G in this example) continue to be displayed. , CZ stock icon SI indicating that CZ is stocked.

In this example, the number of remaining games in the stock time is not subtracted during the predictive effect, but the number of remaining games may be subtracted even during the predictive effect. Further, even when the CZ lottery is won, the CZ stock icon SI may be configured not to be displayed, and in this case, the portent effect may be configured not to be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 21(h) is the final game state of the stock time (low probability mode), and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 21(i) is the transition from the stock time (low probability mode) to the CZ state. is.

In this example, since one CZ was stocked during the stock time (low probability mode), after transitioning to the weak CZ state, in the weak CZ state, the CZ transition notification ( In this example, an image including a display of a character string “Enter CZ!”) is displayed, and a weak CZ background image (in this example, an image of the sea and sandy beach) that suggests that the production state is a weak CZ state is displayed. ) is displayed.

Also, in this example, an example of the production in the stock time (low probability mode) is shown, but in the stock time (high probability mode), for example, the production shown in FIG. 21(j) is performed.

In the stock time (high probability mode) presentation, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (48 G in this example) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a high-probability mode background image HD (in this example, a plurality of character strings of striped image).

The high-probability mode background image HD is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (a position at a predetermined distance from both ends). Then, the display of 48G) is preferably displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the high-probability mode background image HD.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel special about the high-probability mode, and to increase the expectation of the player during the stock time (first period). In addition to being able to make the high-probability mode background image HD stand out, the high-probability mode background image HD does not hinder visibility of other images (display of the number of remaining games, etc.).

<Production example on a normal stage>
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, an example of an effect in a normal stage will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a normal stage in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 22(a) is the state of the normal stage (low probability mode). In the same state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a normal stage background image (in this example, an image of the inside of a castle) that suggests that the production state is the normal stage.

The state shown in FIG. 22(b) is the normal stage (low-probability mode) state, in which the CZ lottery is won.

In this state, the normal stage background image (image of the castle interior) continues to be displayed, and since the CZ lottery has been won, an indication effect indicating that the CZ lottery has been won is started.

The form of the foreshadowing production is not particularly limited, but in this example, similar to the stock time, the confrontation production showing how the main character confronts the enemy samurai is displayed for a certain period of time from the game winning the CZ lottery (this In the example, it is executed for a period of 5 games).

Specifically, in the premonitory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 22(b), a character string of "Showdown!" In the precursor effect of the second game, the character image of the lord and the character string "It's a game!" are displayed, and in the subsequent precursor effect of the third game shown in FIG. Then, in the 4th game shown in (e) of the same figure, a confrontation scene between the lord and the enemy is displayed, and in the 5th game shown in (f) of the same figure, the lord wins over the enemy. A victory scene and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including a character string "CZ won!") for notifying that the player has won the CZ lottery are displayed.

In addition, when two CZs are stocked in the stock time, it is configured to move to a strong CZ state, but even in the normal stage, a CZ lottery is performed in the premonition effect after winning the CZ, and the CZ lottery is won. In such a case, it may be configured to shift to the strong CZ state, as in the case where two CZs are stocked.

The state shown in FIG. 22(g) is a state in which the normal stage (low-probability mode) has transitioned to the CZ state.

In this example, since the CZ lottery was won in the normal stage (low-probability mode), the CZ state (weak CZ state) is immediately entered from the next game of the omen effect, and then, in the weak CZ state, the CZ state is entered. Display a CZ transition notification (in this example, an image including a display of a character string “CZ rush!”) indicating that the production state is a weak CZ background image (this In the example, an image of the sea and sandy beach) is displayed.

Also, in this example, an example of the effect in the normal stage (low probability mode) is shown, but in the normal stage (high probability mode), for example, the effect shown in FIG. 22(h) is performed.

In the production of the normal stage (high probability mode), in addition to displaying the background image for the normal stage (image of the castle) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, A high-probability mode background image HD (in this example, a band-like image with a plurality of "high probability" character strings) is displayed to suggest that the CZ lottery is in the high-probability mode.

The high-probability mode background image HD is preferably displayed at a position (at a predetermined distance from both ends) that does not overlap both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

In this example, the background image for the normal stage (the image inside the castle) and the background image for the stock time (the image of the night sky including the moon) are different images, but they may be the same image. The same image may be used only for the high-probability mode of the stage and stock time, and different images may be used for the low-probability mode of the normal stage and stock time, or vice versa.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes control means (for example, the (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400 shown), wherein the plurality of game states include a first game state (for example, a normal stage shown in FIG. 19), A second game state (for example, CZ state and AT state shown in FIG. 19) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state of is included, and the control means sets the first game state. It is possible to set the second game state based on the establishment of a certain condition (for example, winning the CZ lottery), and the control means controls the first period (for example, FIG. 20 (a), the stock time of 50 games), even if the certain condition is satisfied, the second game state is not set during the first period, and the first game state is set. The game machine is characterized in that the second game state is set after the end of the period.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if a certain condition is satisfied, the second game state is not entered until the first period ends. It can be enjoyed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) are provided, and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, a normal section shown in FIG. 19), the first game state and the An advantageous state including a second game state (for example, the advantageous section shown in FIG. 19) is included, and is configured to be able to notify operation information (for example, operation navigation) of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the operation information may be in a more advantageous state than the normal state with respect to the notification of, and when the normal state transitions to the advantageous state, the transition to the first period may occur.

With such a configuration, when the state is shifted to the advantageous state, the period shifts to the first period, so the expectation from the previous advantageous state can be maintained, and when the state is shifted from the normal state to the advantageous state. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which too many balls come out in a short time and the gambling property becomes higher than necessary.

Also, the first period may be a period in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the second period (certain period other than the first period).

With such a configuration, the first period can be made to feel special compared to the second period, and the player's sense of expectation in the first period can be heightened.

In addition, the first period may include a normal period (e.g., low probability mode) and an advantageous period (e.g., high probability mode) in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal period. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel anticipation for the advantageous period (high-probability mode) in the first period, and to increase the player's willingness to play in the first period. In a certain period (second period) excluding the first period, a normal period (for example, a period in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery or AT lottery is relatively low) and the above-mentioned certain period than the normal period An advantageous period (for example, a period in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery or the AT lottery is relatively high) in which conditions are likely to be satisfied may be included.

Also, the effects executed during the normal period and the effects executed during the advantageous period differ in at least a part of the effects mode (for example, in the high probability mode, the high probability mode background shown in FIG. 21(j) It may be an image HD (displaying a belt-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "High Accuracy").

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the advantageous section (high-probability mode) feel special, and to increase the player's expectation in the first period.

Moreover, even if the certain condition is satisfied during the first period, the certain condition may be satisfied during the period of the first period after the certain condition is satisfied. may

With such a configuration, even if a certain condition is met, the transition to the second game state does not occur until the first period ends, so if the certain condition is met early in the first period even if
It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the second game state includes a third game state (for example, weak CZ state) and a fourth game state (for example, strong CZ state, AT fixed CZ state) that is more advantageous than the third game state. state) is included, and if the number of times the certain condition is satisfied in the first period is the first number (for example, once), the third game state is changed after the end of the first period set, and if the number of times the certain condition is established in the first period is a second number (for example, two times or more), the fourth game state is set after the end of the first period can be anything.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new game feature of how many times a certain condition is satisfied before the first period ends, and to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even after a certain condition is satisfied, the sense of anticipation can be maintained without impairing the gameplay. In addition, it is possible to suppress the gambling property from becoming too high, and by establishing a second number of certain conditions during the first period, the game state shifts to a fourth game state that is more advantageous than the third game state. Therefore, it is possible to moderately arouse the player's expectations.

<<Embodiment 2>>
A gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 23 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of each pattern is printed on a band-shaped member at equal intervals, and this band-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 (see FIG. 26). ). As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are vertically displayed approximately three times from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. there is

By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light part and the light-receiving part. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1 or a special combination 2) has been internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or during a bonus game (special combination 1 and 2 games It is a lamp that informs the player that the state is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The effect button 156 is an operating means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, the button is configured by a button that can be pressed by the player, and is used for various effects. The operating means used for such effects are not limited to buttons, and may be configured with, for example, a lever, a touch panel, or the like, or a plurality of operating means may be provided.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The number-of-payout display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a pushing-order effect. In this example, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. Each stop button 137 to 13
9 may be provided with a light-emitting body, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting body can be turned on to inform the player.

Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop. The operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order (or push order).

The order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is as follows: left stop button 137 is indicated by "left or R", middle stop button 138 by "middle or C", and right stop button 139 by "right or R". , (1) left→middle→right operation order (left center right or LCR), (2) left→right→middle operation order (left center right or LRC), (3) middle→left→right operation order ( (Central Right Left or CLR), (4) Middle→Right→Left Operation Order (Center Right Left or CRL), (5) Right→Left→Center Operation Order (Right Left Center or RLC), (6) Right→Center→Left There are six types of operation order (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 . The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加

The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has become.

It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Further, inside the main body 101, there are a setting key that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation, and an operation for changing settings (setting value changing operation) and an operation for checking settings by pressing. A setting switch is provided to enable The setting key is an operation means for starting to change or confirm setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the setting switch can set one of a plurality of setting values. It is one of the effective setting means.

<Winning line>
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the winning line will be explained. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

As described with reference to FIG. 23, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are vertically displayed three times from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112 when viewed from the player. A total of nine patterns are visible.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is the left reel upper stage symbol, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; symbol position 2) is referred to as the left reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is referred to as the left reel lower stage symbol.

In addition, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 4) is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel, and the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 5). ) is referred to as the middle reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is referred to as the middle reel lower stage symbol.

In addition, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7) is the upper symbol of the right reel, and the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8). ) is referred to as the right reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 9) is referred to as the right reel lower stage symbol.

In this embodiment, as the winning line, a middle winning line L1 (hereinafter simply referred to as It may be called a “winning line L1”.) is provided.

Here, the winning line is a line set at a symbol stop position that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 113, and a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, is displayed. It is a line for which it is determined whether or not the lines are aligned (whether or not they are aligned). A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 medals. When the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the winning lines are activated, and when 3 medals are betted, the winning line L1 is enabled. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

Hereinafter, in the symbol display window 113, symbol positions 2, 5 and 8 on the winning line L1 are designated as "winning positions", and other symbol positions, that is, symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 are designated as "non-winning positions". It may be called "winning position". That is, the winning position is a position on the winning line at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stop.

Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the winning line L1, an upper winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel upper symbols and right reel upper symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. A total of three lines of the lower pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets on medals may be set as valid pay lines.

<Control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 (this circuit contains two random number generation circuits) that derives a numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a. and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 Game control is started (main control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

A random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers used in the basic circuit 302 . Random number generation in the random number generation circuit 316 can be broadly divided into two methods: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at predetermined time intervals is obtained and derived as a random number. There are two more methods in random mode. A first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method is to read numerical values from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical values as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random value generation circuit 316 uses the value obtained in this way as the initial value of the counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random value, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical type of reel 110 sensor, optical sensor of reel 111, optical sensor of reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through. It becomes L level every time. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 (external collective terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the provided information input circuit 652 .

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. It is connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface, and a pressing operation of the production button 156. is connected to the effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting the . The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 (hereinafter also referred to as “liquid crystal display device 157”). The second sub control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units such as .

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the pattern arrangement applied to each reel 110 to 112 will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 frames numbered 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (9 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. . Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 0 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 1 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the frame numbered 0 on the right reel 112 has a "replay pattern". ” are placed respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 shows the types of winning combinations, names of conditional devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts, and remarks.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination (special combination 1, special combination 2), a general combination (replay combination 1 to 3, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. It should be noted that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and can be arbitrarily adopted, and some of the winning combinations are omitted in FIG.

<Types of Winning Roles/Special Roles>
Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals (a combination to which a replay is awarded). These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands".

In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the winning line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role are included.

Special role 1 and special role 2 are winning combinations in which the game state shifts to special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) due to internal winning, and the game state shifts to special role 1/2 game state (RT4) due to winning. is. In addition, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out in the special combination 1/2 game state (RT4), the game state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). Each game state (RT1 to RT4) will be described later.

The symbol combination corresponding to special role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1 pattern - Seven 1 pattern - Seven 1 pattern" or "Seven 2 pattern - Seven 2 pattern - Seven 2 pattern", and special role 2 (RB) The corresponding symbol combination is "BAR symbol--BAR symbol--BAR symbol".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role is internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is It will be easy to win all together.

<Types of Winning Roles/Replay Roles>
The re-playing hands 1 to 3 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. Corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. The replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when the replay role is won, the insertion of medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of inserted medals is reset in the inserted medal number storage area), or the replay role may be won. The medals inserted in the played game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

<Types of Winning Roles/Small Roles>
Small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 5 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a payout number).

A small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is a winning combination in which a symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1 and 5 medals are paid out.

The small combination 2 (cherry) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1 and two medals are paid out. The symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" indicates that the symbol on the left reel 110 may be "cherry symbol", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols. .

Hereinafter, these small wins 1 (watermelon) and small wins 2 (cherry) may be collectively referred to as “rare wins”, but the rare wins are not limited to these winning wins. Either one of the winning combinations may be used, or another winning combination may be added.

<U>In addition, if you win a rare role in the AT state described later, you can add the number of games,
Set</U>
<U> A lottery that increases the number of tokens is executed (it is easier to win the lottery). one</U>
<U>On the other hand, even if you win a rare role in the ED state, the number of games or sets will be increased</U>
The lottery to <U> is not executed. </U>
<U></U> As shown in FIG. 28, the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) consists of 6 types of winning combinations of small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f. In this example, by lottery, with a predetermined probability (in this example, about 1/6; common to all settings), one of the small wins 3a to 3f is internally won, and stopped by the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the operation order (pressing order) of the operations matches the correct pressing order corresponding to the internally won winning combination, a prize is won and 12 medals are paid out (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28).

In the small combination 4 (common bell), regardless of the operation order (push order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, the symbol combination of "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" is on the winning line L1. This is a winning combination that is stopped and 12 medals are paid out.

In the small win 5 (one win), regardless of the operation order (pushing order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, the symbol combination of "replay symbol-replay symbol-blank 1 symbol" is the winning line L1. This is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed at the top and that one medal is paid out.

<Small role 3 (push order bell) and AT game>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b), the relationship between the small win 3 (push order bell) and the AT game will be described.

FIG. 28(a) is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and remarks corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination), and FIG. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game in which the combination 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and the AT game.

The small winning combination 3 (push order bell) includes a small combination 3a (push order bell LCR), a small combination 3b (push order bell RLC), a small combination 3c (push order bell CRL), a small combination 3d (push order bell LRC), It consists of 6 types of winning combinations, ie, a small combination 3e (push-order bell CLR) and a small combination 3f (push-order bell RCL).

When the small combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won, depending on the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the pay line L1, and AT It is determined whether the game is favorable or unfavorable.

Although the details will be described later, in this example, among the six types of pressing order bells of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f, the small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC), the small winning combination 3c (pushing order bell CRL), and the small winning combination 3e (Push order bell CLR), 4 types of small combination 3f (push order bell RCL), 12 medals are paid out when the stop operation is performed according to the irregular push that is the correct operation order. For this reason, when a small win 3 (push order bell) is internally won, if the stop operation is performed according to the irregular push, there is a probability of 4/6 that a small win (push order bell) is won.
A game in which a prize is won and a stop operation is performed according to irregular pressing is a "high-base game" in which the number of medals obtained is relatively large.

On the other hand, in the present example, among the six kinds of pressing order bells of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f, the small winning combination 3a (pressing order bell LCR) is stopped according to the correct operation order, which is the forward pressing. 12 medals are paid out, and 12 medals are paid out when the minor winning combination 3d (push order bell LRC) is stopped according to the correct operation order of hitting scissors. Therefore, when the small win 3 (push order bell) is internally won, if the stop operation is performed according to the forward push or the scissors strike, the small win (push order bell) will be won with a probability of 2/6. A game in which a stop operation is performed according to pushing or hitting with scissors is a "low-base game" in which the number of medals obtained is relatively small.

The six types of small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f will be specifically described below.

<Small role 3a (pushing order bell LCR)>
When the small win 3a (push order bell LCR) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, the order push (LCR)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

On the other hand, a small winning combination 3a (push order bell LCR) is internally elected, and according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, scissors hitting (LRC)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order. When a stop operation is performed, symbol combinations other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3a (push order bell LCR) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CLR, CRL, When the stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), a symbol combination other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. becomes.

Here, "AT game becomes disadvantageous" means "to make the ease of acquiring game value in AT game disadvantageous by the player", for example, the stop operation was performed by irregular pressing in the normal game In the game, AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of AT game is reduced, the number of initial games at the time of AT winning and the probability of addition are disadvantageous depending on the number of irregular pushes, and each game point lottery is performed. When irregular pushing is performed on a game machine that determines AT performance according to the points, the point lottery becomes disadvantageous, and in a game in which a stop operation is performed by irregular pushing in a normal game, the probability of winning the AT lottery is lowered. , To reduce the execution frequency of operation navigation in AT games, not to execute set continuation lottery in AT games, to lower the winning probability of set continuation lottery in AT games, and the like. On the other hand, "AT game becomes advantageous" means "making the ease of acquisition of game value in AT game advantageous for the player".

As described above, in this example, when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, the forward pressing (LCR) or the scissors hitting (LRC) is performed, the AT game becomes advantageous, and when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, the irregular pressing is performed. (Any one of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL) was designed to make the AT game disadvantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. LCR) or scissors striking (LRC) does not change the advantage of the AT game, and if you perform an irregular push (either CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL) when internally elected to the small combination 3, the AT game It may be disadvantageous, and if a forward push (LCR) or a scissors strike (LRC) is performed when a small win 3 is internally won, the AT game becomes advantageous, and when a small win 3 is internally won, it is irregular. push (
CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL) may be performed so that the advantage of the AT game does not change.

<Small role 3b (Push order bell RLC)>
When the small win 3b (push order bell RLC) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (RLC)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small combination 3b (push-order bell RLC) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect-answer operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect-answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors When the stop operation is performed according to the strike (LRC), the symbol combinations other than the ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3b (push order bell RLC) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CLR, CRL, When a stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small role 3c (pushing order bell CRL)>
When the small win 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (CRL)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, a small combination 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors When the stop operation is performed according to the strike (LRC), the symbol combinations other than the ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3c (push order bell CRL) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CLR, RLC, When a stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small win 3d (pushing order bell LRC)>
When a small win 3d (push order bell LRC) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (in this example, scissors strike (LRC)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

On the other hand, a small combination 3d (push order bell LRC) is internally elected, and according to a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR)) among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order. When a stop operation is performed, symbol combinations other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3d (push order bell LRC) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CLR, CRL, When the stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), a symbol combination other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. becomes.

<Small role 3e (pushing order bell CLR)>
When the small win 3e (push order bell CLR) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular push (CLR)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, a small win 3e (push-order bell CLR) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect-answer operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect-answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors When the stop operation is performed according to the strike (LRC), the symbol combinations other than the ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3e (push order bell CLR) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CRL, RLC, When a stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small win 3f (push order bell RCL)>
When the minor win 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally won among the small wins 3 (push order bell), and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular press (RCL)) , the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stop-displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, a small combination 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors When the stop operation is performed according to the strike (LRC), the symbol combinations other than the ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern'' are stop-displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is advantageous.

In addition, a small combination 3f (push order bell RCL) is internally elected, and among a plurality of incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular pushes (CRL, CLR, When a stop operation is performed according to any of RLC)), symbol combinations other than "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

In this example, one medal is paid out in the event that a small winning combination 3a to a small winning combination 3f is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of incorrect operation. The number is not limited to 1, and may be 0, or may be 1 or more as long as it is less than 12 paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct operation order.

<Small role 5 (1 sheet role)>
Next, the relationship between the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination) and the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIGS. 28(a) and 28(c).

FIG. 28(a) shows the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and remarks corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (push-order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (one-piece winning combination), and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of stop buttons 137 to 139 and the setting suggestion effect A in a game in which a hand 5 (single hand) is internally won.

If you win a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) internally, regardless of the operation order (pressing order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, you will win a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination). One medal is paid out, but whether or not the setting suggesting effect A can be executed is determined according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137-139.

As a specific example, when a small win 5 (one win) is internally won and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)). , a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, and the setting suggesting effect A becomes executable.

On the other hand, a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won, and a stop operation is performed according to an operation order other than a predetermined operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (either CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL)). In this case, a small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, but the setting suggestion effect A is not executed.

In this example, when the small winning combination 5 (1-piece winning combination) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the irregular pressing, the setting suggestion effect A becomes unexecutable. 5 (1 piece role), if the internal winning is won, the operation navigation is displayed, and if the stop operation that does not follow the operation navigation is performed (if the stop operation is performed ignoring the operation navigation), setting suggestion production A may be configured to be in a non-executable state.

Also, in this example, when the small win 5 is internally won and the stop operation is performed by irregular pressing, one medal is paid out, but the number of payouts is not limited to one. 0 may be used.

Here, the setting suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the currently set setting values (in this example, setting 1 to setting 6) by using effect elements in the slot machine 100, and setting suggesting effects to be described later. The effect A and the setting suggesting effect B are one of the setting suggesting effects.

The effect element used for the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but for example, display by display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23), sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25) Output sound, light output from light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, lamps such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 23), and the movable body (for example, in FIG. 23 The movement (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement) of the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG.

In this example, when the stop operation is performed in an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, irregular pressing), the setting suggesting effect A cannot be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect A may be executed less frequently.

In addition, although the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is the same as when the stop operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)), the setting suggestion effect Of these, effects that definitely suggest the setting value (for example, effects that include a display such as “setting 5 confirmed”) are executed less frequently (effects that vaguely suggest the setting value (for example, “setting 5? setting 6 ?”) may be executed more frequently).

In addition, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect A is lower than when the stop operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)), and The execution frequency of the effect that definitely suggests the setting value may also be reduced.

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is a default RT-based game state (hereinafter also referred to as “normal game state”) that is initially set immediately after the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on. This game state is relatively disadvantageous compared to other game states.

In this example, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when a replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1) or replay combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is won, a replay high probability state (RT2) described later transition to Also, in this replay low probability state (RT1), when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) to be described later.

<Replay High Probability State (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this replay high probability state (RT2), when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) to be described later.

<Special roles 1 and 2 internal elected state (RT3)>
Special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, This is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In this example, in this special combination 1/2 internal winning state (RT3), when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won, the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In this example, in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number (for example, 200) is paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered.

In this example, the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are not particularly limited. It may be the case that the game has been played a number of times (for example, 6 times).

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be explained.

The game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. A low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, or a normal section. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low navigation state, and is also called AT mode or advantageous section.

Here, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the stop operation mode (for example, the correct operation order or the timing of the stop operation) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to obtain medals or maintain an advantageous gaming state. , an effect (for example, an effect of displaying the characters “left→middle→right”) for notifying the correct operation order of a winning combination (for example, a small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell LCR)).

When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, the result is advantageous to the player, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine relative to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It means that the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate) is advantageous.

In this example, the low navigation state is a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The non-execution state and high-navigation state may be set to the state in which operation navigation is executed.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal game state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ED (ending) state. there is Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ED state are, in principle, states in which the ball output increases.

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is established in the normal game state of the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, for example, it moves in the order of fixed announcement state → AT1 state → judge state, and from this judge state, it goes through the withdrawal state to the normal game state or AT2 state, or directly from the judge state, AT2 There is a route to transition to a state, and so on.

AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is a state in which a predetermined number of AT games (for example, 30 games in one set) can be played. This is an advantageous state for the player.

In this AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed as to whether or not to continue the AT game in the starting game of the AT game, and when this set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (In this example, 1 set of 30 games) AT games are given, and the AT state is extended. Also, when the condition for shifting to the normal game state is established in the AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are completed), the next game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), the state shifts to the ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) effect suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed. be.

The condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) remaining in the high navigation state. , "the number of coins to be acquired + the difference in the number of coins to be acquired>2000".

<Setting Suggestion Effect A>
Next, setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game periods of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A. FIG.

In this example, in the advantageous section, the internal lottery at the time of pressing the start lever 135 (lever on) internally wins a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination), and a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors (LRC)), when the stop button 137 to 139 is operated to stop, by executing the setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table described later, Setting suggestion effect A becomes executable.

When it is decided to execute the setting suggesting performance A by the setting suggesting performance A lottery, the suggesting performance suggesting that the setting suggesting performance A will be executed is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, the internal lottery at the time of pressing the start lever 135 (lever on) is internally elected to the small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination), and the operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, Irregular press (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)) When the stop button 137 to 139 is operated to stop, the setting suggestion effect A lottery is not executed, so the setting suggestion effect A or the setting suggestion effect A is not executed. None of the suggestive renditions suggesting that is executed are executed.

It should be noted that, in this example, the stop button 137 is internally elected to the small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination), and a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC)). An example of executing the setting suggestion effect A lottery when the stop operation of to 139 is performed will be shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it may be executed when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in a predetermined operation order, or a predetermined winning combination (for example, 1 It may be executed when a prize is won, or when a predetermined number of medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (for example, 1 by irregular pressing). It may be executed when there is a payout of medals, etc.).

In addition, when a small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally elected, and a forward press (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC) is stopped, one medal is paid out, a small winning combination 5 is internally won, and an irregular pressing is performed. When the stop operation is performed with , the payout of medals may not be performed, and whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A lottery may be determined according to the number of payouts of medals when the small win 5 is internally won.

In other words, the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect A lottery may be internal winning of a small winning combination of 5 (one winning combination) and payout of one medal.

The setting suggestion performance A lottery in this example has two types, a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the setting suggestion performance A has a higher execution probability than the low probability mode.

The conditions for starting the low-probability mode and high-probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. , a high-probability mode for a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) is set. In this high-probability mode, when a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) have passed without execution of the setting suggestion effect A, the next game is shifted to the low-probability mode. On the other hand, in the high-probability mode, when the setting suggestion effect A is executed before the predetermined number of games (10 games) has passed (the eighth game in this example), the game in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed Shift to low probability mode from the next game.

Conventionally, when AT state, ED state, etc. are completed, it immediately shifts from high navigation state (advantageous section) to low navigation state (normal section) and then to high navigation state (advantageous section). There are many players who immediately end the game (immediately quit) when transitioning from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section). Advantageous section), by setting a high-probability mode period with a high probability of execution of setting suggestion production, which is different from the low-probability mode period ), it is possible to make it difficult to end the game immediately (immediately quit), and the operating rate can be improved.

In addition, the conditions for setting the high probability mode are not particularly limited. If not), the high probability mode may be set, if a predetermined winning role is won, the high probability mode may be set, and if the lottery is won, the high probability mode may be set. You may

<Setting Suggestion Effect A Selection Table>
FIG. 29(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect A selection table used for the setting suggestion effect A lottery.

The setting suggesting effect A lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the setting suggesting effect A is to be executed, and if it is to be executed, the effect contents of the setting suggesting effect A. In this example, when it is determined by the lottery to execute the setting suggesting effect A, after executing the suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed in the game in which the lottery is executed, In the next game, the setting suggestion effect A is executed.

Note that the game in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed is not limited to the game following the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed. may be a game of Also, the game in which the suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggesting effect A lottery is executed, and may be before the setting suggesting effect A is executed.

Of the "details of effect" in the setting suggestion effect A selection table shown in FIG. The content of the performance A is shown.

In the setting suggestion effect A, among the plurality of types of effect elements, the display by the display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23) and the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25) ) to produce an effect using the sound output from.

Note that the effect element used in the setting suggestion effect A may be of a plurality of types, and may be displayed by display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23), sound output means (for example, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 25, 277), light output from light output means (e.g., backlight of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, lamps such as side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 23), and movable bodies (e.g., Movements of the shutter (shielding device) 163) shown in FIG. 23 (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement) and the like can be arbitrarily combined.

The effect content "even number suggestion image" is an image suggesting that the setting value may be an even number (in this example, one of setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6) as setting suggestion effect A. This is an effect of displaying on the display device 157 and outputting from the speakers 272 and 277 a voice suggesting that the set value may be an even number.

The effect content "odd number suggestion image" is an image suggesting that the setting value may be an odd number (one of setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5 in this example) as setting suggestion effect A. This is an effect of displaying on the display device 157 and outputting from the speakers 272 and 277 a voice suggesting that the set value may be an odd number.

The effect content "high setting suggesting image" is an image suggesting that the set value may be set to a high setting (setting 5 or setting 6 in this example) as setting suggesting effect A on the liquid crystal display device 157. This is an effect of outputting from the speakers 272 and 277 a voice suggesting that the set value may be set to a high value while displaying the result.

The effect content "even number setting confirmation image" is an image suggesting that the setting value is confirmed to be an even number (in this example, any of setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6) as setting suggestion effect A. is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a voice indicating that the set value is confirmed to be an even number is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The effect content "4 or more confirmed image" indicates that the setting value is set to 4 or more (in this example, any of setting 4, setting 5, or setting 6) as setting suggestion effect A. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277 indicating that the set value is confirmed to be 4 or more.

The effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is an image suggesting that the set value is set at 5 or more (in this example, setting 5 or setting 6) as the setting suggesting effect A, which is displayed on the liquid crystal display. This is an effect of displaying on the device 157 and outputting from the speakers 272 and 277 a voice suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 5 or more.

The effect content "6 confirmed image" is a setting suggesting effect A in which an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 to indicate that the set value is set to 6 and that the set value is set to 6. This is an effect in which a sound suggesting that something is confirmed is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

Note that the content of the setting suggesting effect is not limited to this example. An effect suggesting a range (for example, an effect including a display or sound such as "setting 2 to setting 4") or the like may be used.

<Setting Suggestion Effect A / Low Probability Mode>
In the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A, the lottery data corresponding to the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A selection table is referred to, and whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A is executed based on the current set value. If so, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect A is determined.

For example, when the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed. If the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 99% chance that “no execution” will be selected and the setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content “even number setting confirmed image” will be executed. A setting suggestion effect A is executed.

If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 98% chance that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed, and a 1% probability is that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is selected. The setting suggesting effect A is executed, and the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current set value is set to 5, there is a 98% chance that “no execution” will be selected and the setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% chance that the effect content “4 or more confirmed image” will be selected. A setting suggesting effect A is executed, and the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 96% chance that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed, and a 1% probability is that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is selected. Execute the setting suggestion effect A, with a probability of 1%, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content “4 or more confirmed image”, and with a 1% probability, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content “5 or more confirmed image” Execute, and with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "6 finalized image" is executed.

<Setting Suggestion Effect A / High Probability Mode>
In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A, lottery data corresponding to the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A selection table are referred to, and the performance contents of the setting suggestion performance A are determined based on the current set values. In the high-probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect A is always executed.

When the current set value is set 1, there is a 47% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestive image" is executed, and with a 47% probability, the setting suggestion effect with the effect content "odd number suggestive image" is executed. The effect A is executed, and the setting suggestive effect A of the effect content "high setting suggestive image" is executed with a probability of 6%.

When the current setting value is setting 2, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content “even number suggestive image” is executed with a probability of 56%, and the effect content “odd number suggestive image” setting suggestion is executed with a probability of 38%. The performance A is executed, the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``high setting suggestion image'' is executed with a probability of 5%, and the setting suggestion performance A of the performance content ``even number setting fixed image'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current setting value is setting 3, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content “even number suggestive image” is executed with a probability of 37%, and the effect content “odd number suggestive image” setting suggestion is executed with a probability of 55%. The effect A is executed, and the setting suggesting effect A of the effect content "high setting suggesting image" is executed with a probability of 8%.

When the current set value is set 4, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even number suggestive image" is executed with a probability of 54%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive image" is suggested with a probability of 34%. Execution of effect A, 8% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A of effect content ``high setting suggestion image'', 3% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A of effect content ``even number setting confirmed image'', The setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current set value is set to 5, the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestive image" is executed with a probability of 31%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive image" with a probability of 58%. Execution of effect A, with a probability of 9% execution of setting suggestion effect A of effect content "high setting suggestive image", execution of setting suggestive effect A of effect content "4 or more confirmed image" with probability of 1%, The setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current set value is set to 6, there is a 51% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content “even number suggestive image” is executed, and with a 29% probability, the setting suggestion effect with the effect content “odd number suggestive image” is executed. Execution of effect A, 10% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A of effect content ``high setting suggestion image'', 5% probability to execute setting suggestion effect A of effect content ``even number setting confirmed image'', With a probability of 2%, the effect content “4 or more confirmed image” setting suggestion effect A is executed, and the effect content “5 or more confirmed image” is executed with a probability of 2%
, and with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "6 finalized image" is executed.

As described above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the high-probability mode, compared to the low-probability mode, the effect that vaguely suggests the set value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", " High setting suggestive image”) has a high execution probability. By doing so, even in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

Also, in the low-probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so when it is executed, the production that vaguely suggests the setting value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", "high setting suggestive image") is executed. By making the probability low, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being too difficult to guess.

The second feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the low probability mode, setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3. points. By doing so, when the execution probability itself is extremely low, the effect that gives a good impression is executed (the effect that gives a good impression is executed in the case of setting 4 to setting 6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the selection probability shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in setting 1 to setting 3 of low probability mode, it was not executed, but it may be executed, and in high probability mode, it was always executed, but it is not executed You can make it happen.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B>
Next, setting suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game periods of the high-probability mode and low-probability mode of setting suggestion effect B. FIG.

In this example, in the AT state and ED state of the advantageous section, in the internal lottery at the time of pressing the start lever 135 (lever on), a rare combination (in this example, a small combination 1 (watermelon) or a small combination 2 (cherry)) In the case of internal winning, regardless of the operation order (pressing order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139, by executing the setting suggestion effect B lottery using the setting suggestion effect B selection table described later. , setting suggestion effect B becomes executable.

The setting suggestion performance B lottery of this example has two types, a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the probability of executing the setting suggestion performance B is higher than the low probability mode.

The conditions for starting the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. In the state game, a high probability mode is set. Therefore, in this example, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the ED state is higher than the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the AT state. It should be noted that the execution frequency of the setting suggesting effect B in the AT state may be set to 0%, and the setting suggesting effect B may not be executed in the AT state.

Further, in this example, the execution period of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B (20 games+α in this example) is at least longer than the execution period of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A (10 games in this example). also for a long period of time.

Although details will be described later, in the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, when the rare combination is won, the setting suggestion effect B is always executed. It can be said that the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A having an extremely low execution probability.

In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, even if the setting suggestion effect B is executed before the predetermined number of games (20 games+α) has passed, until the end condition of the ED state is satisfied, If the high-probability mode is continued and the conditions for ending the ED state are satisfied and the high-navigation state (advantageous section) shifts to the low-navigation state (normal section), setting-suggestion effects including setting-suggestion effects A and B are performed. When the low navigation state (normal section) shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section) again without execution, the high probability mode of setting suggestion effect A is set.

According to this example, by providing a high-probability mode period in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance is high, which is different from the period of the low-probability mode, the game is immediately terminated (immediately quit) after the period of the low-probability mode ends. It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to improve the operating rate.

In addition, in the ED state, even if the player wins the rare role, the additional lottery is not executed. By executing, it is possible to relieve the player's feeling of loss.

It should be noted that the period from the end of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A to the start of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B is longer than the period from the end of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B to the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A. It is preferable that the period until the stochastic mode starts (the period shown as the normal section in FIG. 30(a)) is shorter, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B Selection Table>
FIG. 30(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used for the setting suggestion effect B lottery.

The setting suggesting effect B lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the setting suggesting effect B is to be executed, and if it is to be executed, the effect contents of the setting suggesting effect B. In this example, when it is determined by the lottery that the setting suggestion effect B is to be executed, the setting suggestion effect B is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed.

The game in which the setting suggestion effect B is executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed, and may be a game after the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed.

Among the "details of effect" in the setting suggestion effect B selection table shown in FIG. The contents of the performance B are shown.

In the setting suggestion effect B, the effect is performed using only the sound output from the sound output means (the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25 in this example) among the plurality of types of effect elements.

It should be noted that the number of effect elements used in the setting suggesting effect B may be one or more as long as the effect elements used in the setting suggesting effect B are fewer than the effect elements used in the setting suggesting effect A. , sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25), and light output means (for example, backlights of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, side lamps 144 shown in FIG. 23, etc. lamp), movement (eg, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement) of a movable body (eg, shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 23), etc., one, multiple, Alternatively, all can be arbitrarily selected.

Further, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect B is output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25) among the effect contents of the setting suggestion effect A described using FIG. 29(b). Since it is the same as the effect performed using the voice that is played, the description thereof is omitted.

<Setting Suggestion Effect B / Low Probability Mode>
In the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, the lottery data corresponding to the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B selection table is referred to, and whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance B is executed based on the current set value. If so, the content of the effect of the setting suggestion effect B is determined.

For example, when the current set values are set 1 to set 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect B is not executed. If the current set value is set to 4, there is a 99% chance that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% chance that the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" will be selected. A setting suggestion effect B is executed.

If the current set value is set to 5, there is a 98% chance that “no execution” will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% chance that the effect content “4 or more confirmed voice” will be selected. The setting suggesting performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``5 or more confirmed voice'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is set to 6, there is a 97% chance that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% chance that the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" will be selected. Execute the setting suggestion effect B, execute the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content ``5 or more confirmed voice'' with a probability of 1%, and execute the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content ``6 confirmed voice'' with a probability of 1%. .

<Setting Suggestion Effect B / High Probability Mode>
In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, lottery data corresponding to the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B selection table are referred to, and the performance contents of the setting suggestion performance B are determined based on the current set values. In the high-probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect B is always executed.

If the current set value is set 1, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 38%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is suggested with a probability of 57%. The performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 5%.

When the current setting value is setting 2, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 57%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 38%. The performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 5%.

If the current set value is set to 3, there is a 37% probability that setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestive voice" will be executed, and with a 55% probability, the setting suggestion effect with the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" will be executed. The performance B is executed, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 8%.

When the current set value is set to 4, setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 54%, and setting suggestion effect of the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 36%. The performance B is executed, the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``high setting suggesting voice'' is executed with a probability of 8%, and the setting suggesting performance B of the performance content ``4 or more fixed voice'' is executed with a probability of 2%.

When the current set value is set to 5, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed with a probability of 34%, and the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is suggested with a probability of 51%. Execution of effect B, 10% probability of executing setting suggestion effect B of effect content ``high setting suggestive voice'', 3% probability of executing setting suggestion effect B of effect content ``4 or more confirmed voice'', The setting suggesting effect B of the effect content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 2%.

When the current set value is set to 6, there is a 49% probability that setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestive voice" is executed, and with a 33% probability, the setting suggestion effect with the effect content "odd number suggestive voice" is executed. Execution of effect B, 10% probability to execute setting suggestion effect B of effect content “high setting suggestion voice”, 3.5% probability to execute setting suggestion effect B of effect content “4 or more confirmed voice” Then, the setting suggesting effect B of the effect content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 2.5%, and the setting suggesting effect B of the effect content "6 confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 2%.

As described above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the high-probability mode, compared to the low-probability mode, the effect ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", " High setting suggestive image”) has a high execution probability. By doing so, even in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

Also, in the low-probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so when it is executed, the production that vaguely suggests the setting value ("even number suggestive image", "odd number suggestive image", "high setting suggestive image") is executed. By making the probability low, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being too difficult to guess.

The second feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the low probability mode, setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3. points. By doing so, when the execution probability itself is extremely low, the effect that gives a good impression is executed (the effect that gives a good impression is executed in the case of setting 4 to setting 6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and encourage the player to play for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the selection probability shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in setting 1 to setting 3 of low probability mode, it was not executed, but it may be executed, and in high probability mode, it was always executed, but it is not executed You can make it happen.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, bet number setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Prepare to send the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the effect state control processing relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, control of various effects and the like are performed.

In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

In step S113, an effect state control process relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state ending process for ending the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 32) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 33(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 33(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG. In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 33(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 34(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 34(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 34(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 34(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 34(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S606 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534 . The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A>
Next, an effect example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the example 1 of the effect of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

Rendering example 1 is an rendering example in the case where the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 in the game in which the low probability mode of the setting suggestive rendering A is set, the minor winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won. is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 35(a) is the state before the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on).

In this example, the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the setting suggestion effect A has a low probability in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A character C1 (a character of Sabohani in this example) is displayed to suggest that the mode is set.

The state shown in FIG. 35(b) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed (lever ON). In this example, the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 internally wins a small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination).

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A / forward press>
The state shown in FIG. 35(c) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been stopped by forward pressing (LCR).

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated in the operation order (forward pressing) in which the setting suggestion effect A can be executed, the setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table is executed. , it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect A by the lottery.

In addition, since it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect A in the next game, a treasure box is simulated as a suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 35(d) is a state in which setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game. In this example, as the setting suggestion effect A, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a moving image PD1 (4 or more confirmed images) in which rice pops out of an opened treasure chest. BGM (4 or more confirmed voice) is output.

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. By executing the setting suggestion effect A, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. can increase

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A / irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 35(e) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), and the state shown in FIG. This is the state showing the effect in the next game.

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 were stopped in an operation sequence (irregular pressing) in which setting suggestion effect A cannot be executed, setting suggestion effect A (movie PD1 in this example) and setting suggestion effect None of the suggestive effects (character C2 in this example) suggesting that the effect A will be executed is executed.

If the setting suggestion effect A is executed by an irregular push that results in a high base game, the player can see through the setting while suppressing the number of medals to be inserted. Since the setting suggesting effect A is not executed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the setting from being seen through a high base game, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low base game.

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A>
Next, an effect example 2 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing example 2 of effect of setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

Rendering example 2 is an rendering example in the case where the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 in the game in which the high probability mode of the setting suggestive rendering A is set, the small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won. is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 36(a) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on).

In this example, the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the setting suggestion effect A is produced in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 with a high probability. A character C3 (in this example, a Savohani character covered with an aura image) is displayed to suggest that the mode is set.
In this example, the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 internally wins a small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination).

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A / forward press>
The state shown in FIG. 36(b) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been stopped by forward pressing (LCR).

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated in the operation order (forward pressing) in which the setting suggestion effect A can be executed, the setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table is executed. , it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect A by the lottery.

In addition, since it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect A in the next game, a treasure box is simulated as a suggesting effect suggesting that the setting suggesting effect A will be executed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 36(c) is a state in which setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game.

In this example, as the setting suggestion effect A, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a moving picture PD2 (5 or more confirmed images) in which a panda character jumps out of an opened treasure chest. Dedicated BGM (5 or more confirmed voice) is output.

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. By executing the setting suggestion effect A, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous. can increase

FIG. 36(d) shows a state in which the setting suggestion effect A is terminated and the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is shifted to the low probability mode.

In this example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the display of the setting suggestion effect A started, the setting suggestion effect A is ended, and the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and in the sub-display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a character C1 indicating that the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set (in this example, Sabohani's character) is displayed.

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A / irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 36(e) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by irregular pressing (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), and the state shown in FIG. This is the state showing the effect in the next game.

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 were stopped in an operation sequence (irregular pressing) in which setting suggestion effect A cannot be executed, setting suggestion effect A (movie PD2 in this example) and setting suggestion effect None of the suggestive effects (character C2 in this example) suggesting that the effect A will be executed is executed.

If the setting suggestion effect A is executed by an irregular push that results in a high base game, the player can see through the setting while suppressing the number of medals to be inserted. Since the setting suggesting effect A is not executed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the setting from being seen through a high base game, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low base game.

In this example, when the stop button 137 to 139 is stopped by an irregular press (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL), the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is continued, and the high probability mode is set (in this example, the character of Sabohani covered with an aura image) continues to be displayed, but with the stop operation of the irregular pressing as a trigger, the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A to the low probability mode.

In addition, in the setting suggestion effect A of this example, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is varied according to the setting suggestion image, but the common BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is output regardless of which setting suggestion image is displayed. You can make it work. That is, in this case, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is the BGM for notifying that the setting suggestion effect A is being executed.

Also, the setting suggestion effect A of this example is not executed in the AT state or the ED state, but it may be executed in the AT state or the ED state.

<Production example of setting suggestion production B>
Next, an example of the setting suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the setting suggestion effect B in chronological order.

This example of effect is an example of effect in the case where the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 in the game in which the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B is set, the small winning combination 5 (1 piece winning combination) is internally won. is shown.

The states shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c) are AT states in the advantageous section. In the state shown in FIG. 37(a), the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 indicates that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 201 games, and the BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277. .

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 14B, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 informs that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 200 games, and the BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277. there is

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(c), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the shift to the ED state from the next game is notified, and BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

On the other hand, the states shown in FIGS. 37(d) to 37(f) are ED states in the advantageous section. In the state shown in FIG. 37(d), the ED effect is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the BGM during the ED is output from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

In the subsequent state shown in (e) of the same figure, the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 has internally won a rare combination (in this example, a small combination 1 (watermelon)), so setting suggestion production B A setting suggestion effect B lottery using the selection table is executed, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect B by the lottery, and as the setting suggestion effect B, BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is played from the speakers 272 and 277 (this example , 4 or more definite voices) are output.

In the subsequent state shown in (f) of the same figure, since the internal lottery at the time of pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 has internally won a rare combination (in this example, a small combination 2 (cherry)), setting suggestion production B A setting suggestion effect B lottery using the selection table is executed, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect B by the lottery, and as the setting suggestion effect B, BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is played from the speakers 272 and 277 (this example at high setting (suggestive voice) is output.

According to this example, by executing the setting suggestion effect B, it is possible to suggest the setting value, so that the player's interest can be heightened. In addition, since it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect B (second setting suggestion effect) that suggests the currently set setting value, which is different from the setting suggestion effect A (first setting suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect Variations can be increased, and expectations and interest in setting suggestive effects can be increased.

In addition, according to this example, there is a high possibility that more setting suggestion effects will be executed than in the low probability mode of setting suggestion effects, so by performing setting suggestion effects with a small number of effect elements, setting suggestion effects can be felt annoying. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent interference with other effects in the ED state, perform various effects, and improve the amusement of the game. In addition, in the ED state, even if the player wins the rare role, the additional lottery is not executed. By executing, it is possible to relieve the player's feeling of loss.

In this example, in addition to the BGM during the ED, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is output from the speakers 272 and 277, but only the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is output instead of the BGM during the ED. can be configured to

Also, the setting suggesting effect B of this example is executed in the AT state and the ED state, but it may be executed in states other than the AT state and the ED state, or may be executed only in the ED state. Also good.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG.
112), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.
), setting means (for example, setting key, setting switch) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6), and the plurality of setting values set by the setting means internal lottery means for deriving a result of internal lottery based on lottery information corresponding to a set value (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 31); Stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 31) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result derived by the stop control means game value giving means (for example, medal payout processing shown in FIG. 31) for giving a game value (for example, medals) according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by and controlling the progress of the game, A game control means (for example, game state control processing shown in FIG. 31) that can change the ease of acquiring value, and an effect control means (for example, the first secondary shown in FIG. A game machine comprising a control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500), wherein the game control means is a first game state (for example, a normal game state) and a game state different from the first game state One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, AT state), and the first condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. It is possible to end the first game state and set the second game state based on (for example, winning the AT lottery), and the player's stop button in the first game state is means capable of changing the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state set after the first condition is satisfied, based on the operation result of the A first lottery result (for example, a small winning combination 3b (push order bell RLC), a small combination 3c (push order bell CRL), a small combination 3e (push order bell CLR), a small combination 3f (push order bell RCL) by the internal lottery means )) is derived, when the stop button is operated by a first operation (for example, forward pressing (LCR), scissors hitting (LRC)), the plurality of reels are placed in the first In the game in which the game is stopped in a stop mode (for example, a combination of symbols other than "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern") and the first lottery result is derived, the stop button is operated by a second operation (for example, irregular press (any one of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL)), the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of ``bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern''). means, and the gaming value imparting means is higher when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, payout of one medal) than when stopped in the second stop mode (for example, , payout of 12 medals) is a means for giving more game value, and the game control means derives the first lottery result in the first game state, and the plurality of When the reel is stopped in the second stop mode, the first lottery result is derived in the first gaming state, and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. , when the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state set after the first condition is satisfied is disadvantageous to the player (for example, in a normal game, a stop operation is performed by irregular pressing In the game, the AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of the AT game is reduced, the number of initial games and the probability of winning the AT win are disadvantageous depending on the number of irregular pushes, and each game point lottery is performed. Then, when an irregular push is made on a game machine that determines the performance of the AT according to the point, the point lottery becomes disadvantageous, and in a game in which the stop operation is performed by the irregular push in the normal game, the winning probability of the AT lottery is lowered. , reduce the frequency of operation navigation execution in AT games, do not execute set continuation lottery in AT games, lower the winning probability of set continuation lottery in AT games, etc.) (or always change unfavorably), When the stop button is operated by the first operation in a game in which the second condition is established (for example, a game in which a small win 5 (one-piece win) is internally won), the present setting is performed. A first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, setting suggestion effect A (movie PD1) shown in FIG. 35(e), setting suggestion effect A (movie PD2) shown in FIG. 36(c)) It is a game machine characterized in that it is a means capable of executing

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantage or disadvantage of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to play a low-base game in which the AT has an advantage. By doing so, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous, and it is possible to suggest a set value, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. .

It should be noted that the "condition for fulfilling the second condition" according to the present invention is not limited to internal winning of a winning combination, but winning a certain winning combination, a certain gaming state (for example, an ED state in an advantageous section). , winning a certain lottery, executing a certain effect (for example, a continuous effect), and the like.

Further, the effect control means does not execute the first setting suggestion effect (or may not be implemented).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting detection by the high-base game from being performed, and to encourage (encourage) the player to play the low-base game.

The second condition may include the fact that the internal lottery means derives a second lottery result (for example, a small combination of 5 (1-card combination)). is only for adjusting the base, it is not possible to change the winning probability in order to adjust the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect becomes too high or low. However, if the second condition includes the fact that the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the winning role that adjusts the base can be used as a condition for executing the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to easily adjust the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect by using the winning combination different from the winning combination.

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be an effect executable in the first game state.

Even if the first setting suggestion effect is executed during AT, the advantage and disadvantage of AT are already determined during AT, and the timing is late to encourage low base games, so it is necessary to execute in normal games. However, if the first setting-suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed in the first game state, the first setting-suggestion effect is an effect that also includes the effect of encouraging low-base games in which the AT is advantageous. Therefore, by executing it in the normal game before the AT, it is possible to more effectively encourage the low-base game in which the AT is advantageous.

In addition, the effect control means provides a second setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. (4 or more confirmed voices)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the setting suggesting effect, and to increase the expectation and interest in the setting suggesting effect.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of set values (for example, Based on setting means (for example, setting key, setting switch) capable of setting one setting value among setting 1 to setting 6) and lottery information corresponding to the plurality of setting values set by the setting means Based on the internal lottery means for deriving the result of the internal lottery (for example, winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 31) and the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, Stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 31) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been stopped, and effect control means ( For example, a game machine comprising a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. ), the setting suggestion effect A (video PD2) shown in FIG. 36(c), and the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. The setting suggestion effect is displayed by an effect element (for example, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23) or output from a sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25). and light output from light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, lamps such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 23), and the movable body (for example, shown in FIG. 23 It is a game machine characterized in that it is an effect that suggests the set value currently set by using the movement (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement) of the shutter (shielding device) 163). .

According to the amusement machine according to this example, it is possible to suggest the currently set setting value by the setting suggestion effect using the effect element, so that the player's interest is increased and the operating rate can be improved. can.

In addition, the predetermined period includes a first period (for example, the period of the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 29(a)) and a second period different from the first period (for example, non 10 games after transition from the advantageous interval to the advantageous interval (period of high-probability mode of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. The second period may be easier to implement. Note that the "first period" according to the present invention may be a period during which the setting suggestion effect is less likely to be executed than the "second period", and may be a period during which the setting suggestion is not executed.

With such a configuration, by providing the second period, which is different from the first period and has a high execution probability of the setting suggestion performance, it is difficult to end the game immediately (immediately quit) after the end of the first period. It is possible to improve the operating rate.

In addition, a game control means (for example, a game state control process shown in FIG. 31) is provided to control the progress of the game and change the ease of acquiring the game value, and the game control means is the first game It is possible to set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and the first game state When the first condition is satisfied in the state in which the game state is set (for example, winning the AT lottery), the first game state is terminated and the second game state is set. The second period may be set before the first period after the second game state is finished.

With such a configuration, after the second game state advantageous to the player ends, the second period in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is high is set, so that the game can be played after the second game state ends. can be made difficult to immediately end (immediately quit), and the operating rate can be improved.

Further, the predetermined period is a third period different from the first period and the second period (for example, 20 games in the ED state shown in FIG. 30(a) (high probability mode of setting suggestion effect B). period), and the setting suggestion effect is executed in the third period rather than the first period (for example, the period of the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 29(a)). The third period is longer than the second period (for example, 10 games after transition from the non-advantageous interval to the advantageous interval (the high-probability mode period of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 29(a))). The effect element (for example, the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 36(c)) is used in the setting suggesting effect (for example, the setting suggesting effect A (movie PD2) shown in FIG. 36(c)) in the second period. Display by device 157 and sound output from speakers 272 and 277) used in setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect B (4 or more confirmed sound) shown in FIG. 37E) in the third period There may be fewer production elements (for example, only the sounds output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIGS. 37(e) and 37(f)).

With such a configuration, the third period is longer than the second period, and there is a high possibility that more setting suggestion effects will be executed than during the second period, so it is set with fewer effect elements. By performing the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestive effect from being bothersome. In addition, it is possible to prevent interference with other effects during the third period, perform various effects, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main controller and the first sub-controller, the communication from the first sub-controller to the second sub-controller may be one-way communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

<<Embodiment 3>>
The slot machine of Embodiment 3 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 38 to 60. FIG. In principle, the symbols shown in FIGS. 38 to 60 are used only for the description of this embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 38 to 60 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall composition>
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 38 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) having a plurality of types of patterns (not shown) arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each of the reels 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, and when the bet button 132 is pressed, three cards are inserted (upper limit is three cards). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 196 is a button for production.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. .

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player of the change, the light may also be turned on when performing various notifications described later.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. An upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game, and are also lit when performing various notifications. may cause

A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 provided above the inside of the slot machine 100 to the outside is provided on the upper part of the production device 160. is provided. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a effect image display device 157 (shown in the figure) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. It has a structure that appears on the player's side.

The effect image display device 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and displays for various notifications. may be performed.

It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment,
The display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 notifies of predetermined information by lighting the lamp, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, lighting of the notification lamp 123 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, display devices, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 39 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-like body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key switch (hereinafter also referred to as “setting key SW”, not shown) that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation is provided. The setting key SW is an operation means for starting to change setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example) and confirm setting values, which will be described later. Further, inside the body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter, also referred to as a “reset SW”) is provided that can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) by pressing the switch. The reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch that enables an operation for canceling various errors (error canceling operation) to be described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at positions that can be operated only when the front door 102 is open, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed. . In other words, it is an operating means that can be operated only by the administrator (staff, etc.) of the game parlor, and is an operating means that cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 50, etc.) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Although details will be described later, when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any one of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting value is set by operating the start lever 135. Once the value is confirmed, the setting value is hidden. On the other hand, when the setting value confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. The set value display device 101a is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized only when the front door 102 is open, and is difficult or impossible to be visually recognized when the front door 102 is closed.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 .

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting a key owned by the manager of the amusement arcade into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 38). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

An optical open/close sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided on the right side plate 260 of the main body 101. It is configured so that a light shielding piece of a certain length provided at 102 passes through.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including the open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in an open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is not blocked, the open/close sensor indicates an open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is open. , the detection state becomes the open detection state. The configuration of this detection means is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door body is opened and closed. Conversely, even if the door is in the closed state, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Above the display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and an upper speaker 272 are provided. Below the display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. . Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing starts do).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, open/close sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. to detect The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display device 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 inputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like through the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 consists of a CPU 404 and an R for temporarily storing data.
It is equipped with an AM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button, etc.) via an input/output interface. lamp, chance button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the effect image display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Main control unit main processing>
The main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described below with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main processing of the main control unit according to the control program pre-stored in the ROM 306 .

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Although the details will be described later, in this initial setting process, processes related to initial setting, setting change, recovery process, and the like are performed.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, the presence or absence of insertion of medals is checked, and preparations are made to transmit an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-controller 400 . In addition, if the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, and the replay state is entered. No input required. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed, and in the next step S105, an internal winning combination lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Preparations are made to transmit the internal lottery command shown to the first sub-control unit 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S106, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In this step S108, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-control unit 400 a stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped for each stop operation, and for the stop of each reel, Preparations are made to transmit a reel stop command regarding the stop position of the reel to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S109, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is established. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting processing>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, initialization is performed at startup. In this startup initialization, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition setting, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, the WDT 314 Permission to operate and setting of initial values.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (door is open) based on the output from the open/close sensor. advances to step S205 to execute return processing. Moreover, step S204
Then, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the setting change process, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the return process.

In the recovery process of step S205, the process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power interruption (for example, the process of recovering the recovery data saved in the RAM 308 in the power interruption process of step S411 of the main controller timer interrupt process). etc.), the initialization process ends.

In step S206, after performing the setting change process, the process proceeds to step S207. Although the details will be described later, in this setting change processing, processing related to setting change and the like are performed.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, the initialization process is finished after executing the process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear), the process related to the initial operation, and the like.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process.

In step S301, a process of initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, a setting change start command indicating to start setting change is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When receiving this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for starting display of the management screen.

In step S303, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the numeral 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported error in a state in which some kind of error is detected (hereinafter referred to as each error detection state). Proceed to S305, and if not, proceed to step S306.

Errors handled in this embodiment include hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error), medal insertion abnormalities 2 to 4, medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, prize winning abnormality, and the like. These errors are described below. Door opening (door open error) is not handled as an error, but may be handled as an error.

A hopper empty error (hopper error) is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number (error detection state). . The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the hopper is replenished with medals equal to or more than the prescribed number (after the error is not detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (selector error) occurs when inserted medals stay in the medal selector or the like (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after removing the cause of the error (after the error is not detected). Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds the specified number (becomes an error detection state), and the set value is changed or RA
Canceled by clearing M.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing (error detection state). Medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when inserted medals do not pass normally through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 (error detection state). Error notification for these errors can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the cause of the error has been removed (after an error non-detection state has been established).

Medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven (error detection state). Medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven (error detection state). The medal payout error 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal payout process (error detection state). Error notification for these errors can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the cause of the error has been removed (after an error non-detection state has been established).

An overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the auxiliary medal storage is turned on (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after removing the cause of the error (after the error is not detected). A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example). The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example).

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , shock sensor errors, etc., and the error notification for these errors can also be canceled by operating the error cancellation switch after removing the cause of the error.

In step S305, error notification start processing is executed. In this error notification start process, the main control section 300 displays an error code on the payout number display 127 and transmits an error notification start command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control section 400 . When a plurality of errors are detected in displaying the error code on the payout number display 127, the error code corresponding to one of them is displayed on the payout number display 127 according to the order of priority. Also, when a code corresponding to the door open is displayed on the payout number display 127, priority is given to the display of the error code.

In step S306, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated. If the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S307, and if the operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S307, the current set value is changed. Specifically, the currently set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1 (returns to 1 if the value is 6).

In step S308, it is determined whether or not some kind of error notification is being executed (during each error notification). If each error is being notified, the process proceeds to step S309. If each error is not being notified, the process proceeds to step S311. move on.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not an error notification end condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S310, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S311. In this embodiment, when the cause of the error currently being notified has been resolved (error non-detected state) and the execution period of the error notification exceeds the period of one cycle of the error sound, the error notification end condition is established. In this embodiment, an error sound is output for error notification, and this error sound includes an announcement voice for notifying the content of the error. It is intended to ensure that With this configuration, the contents of the error can be notified to the outside more reliably.

In step S310, error notification end processing is executed. In this error notification termination process, the error notification currently being executed is terminated. Specifically, the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 is erased, the error notification end command is transmitted, and the error display on the 7-segment (SEG) display is ended. If multiple errors are detected, the above processing is executed for the error with the highest priority, and the other errors remain unprocessed (only one error is reported). subject to termination). If there is an error that has not been processed, the error code corresponding to the error with the highest priority is displayed on the payout number indicator 127. - 特許庁

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S312, and if the operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S312, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new setting value (the setting value is confirmed), and in the next step S313, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased. and hide the setting value.

In this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is received. The configuration may be such that the set value is determined only in the case of the state. In this case, when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the setting value cannot be confirmed, but the display of the management screen may be continued.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported error in each error detection state. If there is such an error, the process proceeds to step S315. .

In step S315, the same processing as in step S305 is executed.

In step S316, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated. If so, the process proceeds to step S317, and if not, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S317, it is determined whether or not each error is being reported. If each error is being reported, the process proceeds to step S318. If each error is not being being reported, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S318, it is determined whether or not an error notification end condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S319, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S319, the same process as in step S310 is executed.

At step S320, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S314, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S321. In step S321, a setting change end command indicating to end the setting change is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes processing for ending the display of the management screen.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S402, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>406 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S407, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this device monitoring process, set value confirmation processing, door opening monitoring processing, settlement processing, and the like are performed.

In step S409, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 is set in each original register, and the process returns to the main control unit main process.

On the other hand, in step S411, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure, is saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for at least a predetermined area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main controller timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the device monitoring process.

In step S501, after the set value confirmation process is performed, the process proceeds to step S502. Although the details will be described later, in this setting value confirmation processing, processing related to setting value confirmation is performed. In step S502, door opening monitoring processing is performed.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating an open detection state, stores open detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected in the RAM 308. In addition to storing it, a code indicating door opening is displayed on the payout number display 127, and preparations are made for transmitting a door open detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-controller 400. When an error is detected, the display of the payout number indicator 127 is given priority to the error code.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the closed detection state, close detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected is stored in the RAM 308. In addition to erasing the door open code displayed on the payout number display 127, a door closing detection command indicating that the closing of the front door 102 has been detected is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400. prepare.

In step S503, after performing the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the settlement button 134 sensor during the effective period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when the game can be started until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). When a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated is detected, processing for settlement of electronically accumulated medals is performed, and a settlement command indicating that processing for settlement of medals has been executed is issued by the first subcontroller. Prepare for transmission to unit 400 .

In step S504, after performing other device monitoring processes, the device monitoring process ends. Although the details will be described later, in the other device monitoring process, an error notification start process, an error notification end process, and the like are performed.

<Setting value confirmation processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, setting value confirmation processing (step S501) in the device monitoring processing described with reference to FIG. 45 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the set value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the set value is being checked. If the set value is being checked, the process proceeds to step S606, and if the set value is not being checked, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the setting value confirmation valid period, and if it is the setting value confirmation valid period, the process proceeds to step S603, and if it is not the setting value confirmation valid period, the setting value confirmation processing is terminated.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not the MAX bet state (the state in which the number of medals that can start one game (three in this example) is betted, or the replay state due to replay), but the opening and closing This is the period during which the sensor is not in a closed detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating, and an error is not being reported.

It should be noted that the conditions regarding the setting value confirmation effective period may be any one of the above conditions or any plurality of the above conditions, instead of all of the above conditions. Also, in the above conditions, there is a condition of "not in a max bet state", but it may be "not in a bet state".

At step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. In step S604, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the numeral 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made to send a setting value confirmation start command indicating to start setting value confirmation to the first sub-controller 400. FIG. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this set value check start command from the main controller 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen.

In step S606 during setting value confirmation, it is determined whether or not the door is in the closed state (the open/close sensor detects the closed state). If the door is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S608. .

In step S607 during setting value confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is terminated so as to continue setting value confirmation. Proceed to S608. In step S608, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value, and in the next step S609, a setting value confirmation end command indicating to end the setting value confirmation is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Prepare to send. When the first sub-controller 400 receives this setting value confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not each error detection state (see the description of step S304) is present. If not, other device monitoring processing is terminated. goes to step S702.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not it is an error reportable period, and if it is not an error reportable period, the other device monitoring process is ended, and if it is an error reportable period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error reportable period is a period during which the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not each error is being reported. If not, the process proceeds to step S704, and if each error is being reported, the process proceeds to step S705.

In step S704, error notification start processing (similar to step S305) is executed.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is open (opening). If the door is not open, the other device monitoring process is terminated. proceed to

In step S706, it is determined whether or not the reset switch has been operated. If the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S707, and if the operation has not been performed, other device monitoring processing ends.

In step S707, it is determined whether or not the error notification end condition is satisfied.If the error notification end condition is not satisfied, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and the error notification end condition (similar to step S309) is reached. is established, the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, error notification end processing is executed (similar to step S310).

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 48(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 48(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S801, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing information representing the game state.

In step S803, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805.

In step S805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S807, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed. Here, out of the processes corresponding to this command process, the outline of the process when changing settings, the process when confirming set values, the process corresponding to the state of the open/close sensor, and the process relating to error detection will be described.

The main control unit 300 sends a setting change start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when setting change is started (step S302 in FIG. 43), and sends a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 when setting change is finished. (step S321 in FIG. 43). When receiving the setting change start command, the first sub-control unit 400 emits light from the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode, and outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). . Also, a management screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 . The management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a store clerk to make various settings related to the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, various settings can be made using a cross button (not shown). It has become. Also, when a setting change end command is received, the above various outputs are ended.

The main control unit 300 transmits a setting value confirmation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when starting setting value confirmation (step S605 in FIG. 46), and sends a setting value confirmation end command to the first sub-control unit 400 when finishing setting value confirmation. It is transmitted to the sub-controller 400 (step S609 in FIG. 46). The first sub-controller 400 displays a management screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 when receiving the set value check start command. Also, when the setting value confirmation end command is received, the display of the management screen on the liquid crystal display device 157 is ended.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating an open detection state, transmits a door open detection command to the first sub-control unit 400 and outputs a signal indicating a closed detection state. When detected, a door closing detection command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 (step S502 in FIG. 45). Upon receiving the door open detection command, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the open detection information (in this example, information indicating “open” and the date and time of opening) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information. Execute processing to start notification. On the other hand, when the door closing detection command is received, the closing detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closing) is stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and the door opening notification is terminated. process.

In this embodiment, as the door opening notification, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an opening sound (for example, "the door is opening"). to output Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a character string "Door is being opened" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

When the main control unit 300 detects an error, it transmits an error notification start command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400 (steps S305 and S315 in FIG. 43, step S704 in FIG. 47), and cancels the error. When the operation is performed, an error notification end command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 (steps S310 and S319 in FIG. 43, step S708 in FIG. 47).

The first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of starting error notification when an error notification start command is received. In this example, when a selector error occurs, the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays a character string such as "selector error!!" A column is displayed, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound (“An error has occurred. ). The mode of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, error notification may be performed by movement of the movable means (reels 110 to 112). When an error notification is performed by the sound output means and the light emitter, if a plurality of errors are detected, the error notification for one of the errors is performed according to the order of priority.

Also, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the error notification when the error notification end command is received. In executing error notification in the sound output means and the light emitter, when a plurality of errors are detected, the error notification is terminated for the error with the highest priority, and the error notification for the other errors is executed. Errors are kept unprocessed (only one error is subject to notification termination). If there are unhandled errors, the error notification corresponding to the highest priority error is executed.

The above error notification is given priority over the notification accompanying the door opening. It may be configured to Further, execution of error notification is restricted during execution of setting change processing or confirmation of set values.

In step S809, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S811, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S813, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S815, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S817, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S809. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S803.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 48(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S821 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 48(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S831, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S803 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 48A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S833, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S815, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 49(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 49(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S901 of FIG. 49(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S903, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S907, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S909, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S907, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S911, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S909. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S909, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S903.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 49(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S915 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 49(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S917, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S903 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 49A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S919, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S911 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 49(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S921, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S923, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S925, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S925, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S921, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S927, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S929, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S931, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Explanation of operation example≫
An operation example of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below.

[Example of operation when changing settings]
An example of the case where the setting is changed will be described below with reference to FIG. 50(A).

First, FIG. 50(A)(1) shows a state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power off state is opened and the setting key SW is turned on by the manager of the amusement arcade. . In addition, when the power is off, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are in an off state, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) are in a non-output state, and the display means (effect image display device) 157) is in a non-display state.

Next, FIG. 50(A)(2) shows the state when the power is turned on from the state shown in FIG. 50(A)(1) and turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key SW in the ON state, the slot machine 100 executes a setting change process (step S206 in FIG. 42) and shifts to a state (setting change mode) in which setting values can be changed. is configured to

In this setting change process, a setting change start command is transmitted (step S302 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Then, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and a process for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Further, a process (step S303 in FIG. 43) of displaying the current set value using the set value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 50(A)(2) shows how the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

During execution of the setting change process (setting change mode), each time the operation of the reset switch is detected once, the currently set setting value is updated by adding 1 in the range of 1 to 6, and the setting value is changed. By repeating the process of returning to 1 when exceeding 6, the set value can be changed (step S307 in FIG. 43). FIG. 50(A)(3) shows that the reset SW has been operated, and the number 1 indicating the setting 1 changed by this operation is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. ing.

Furthermore, by operating the start lever 135, the set value is determined and the display on the set value display device 101a is turned off (steps S311 to S313 in FIG. 43). FIG. 50(A)(4) shows the state when the start lever 135 is operated from the state of FIG. 50(A)(3). If the setting key is in the OFF state after the start lever 135 is operated, this setting change process is terminated (step S320 in FIG. 43). At this time, a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is to end is transmitted (step S321 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-controller 400 that has received this command ends various outputs during the setting change (FIG. 43). 48 step S807).

Since the open/close sensor is in the open detection state immediately after the setting change is completed, a door open detection command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 (step S502 in FIG. 45). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 emits light from the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode as door opening notification, and an opening sound (e.g., " The door is being opened.") is output. FIG. 50(A)(5) shows a state in which this door open notification is executed. The state when the setting key is turned off is shown. It should be noted that this state is a state of waiting for the start of the game by the player, and the effect image display device 157 executes processing for displaying a customer waiting effect (step S807 in FIG. 48).

[Operation example when setting value confirmation is executed]
An example of the case where setting value confirmation is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 50(B).

First, in FIG. 50(B)(1), in the slot machine 100 in the power ON state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (waiting for the player to start playing), and the light emitters (various lamps 420 etc.) emit light in a customer waiting light emission mode, the customer waiting BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 displays the customer waiting effect.

Next, FIG. 50(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 50(B)(1) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. ing. In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), Various lamps 420, etc.) are executed to emit light in an open light emission mode (step S807 in FIG. 48). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the setting key SW is turned on from the state shown in FIG. 50(B)(2). FIG. 50(B)(3) shows the state at this time. The slot machine 100 is configured to be in a state (set value confirmation mode) in which the current set values can be checked by turning on the setting key SW (Yes in step S603 of FIG. 46). judgment). In this state, a process (step S604 in FIG. 46) of displaying the current set values using the set value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 50(B)(3) shows how the number 1 indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. In addition, a set value check start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command executes processing for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157. (Steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48). The output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained as the open sound, and the light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) is maintained as the open light emission mode. As for the contents displayed on the effect image display device 157, the same screen as in the setting change mode is displayed. good.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the setting key SW is turned off from the state shown in FIG. 50(B)(3). FIG. 50(B)(4) shows the state at this time. The slot machine 100 is configured so that the state in which the current set values can be checked (set value confirmation mode) is terminated by turning the setting key SW to the OFF state (step S607 in FIG. 46). judgment of Yes). In this case, the display on the set value display device 101a is turned off (step S608 in FIG. 46). In addition, a control command for ending confirmation of set values is transmitted (step S609 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command ends the display of the management screen on the effect image display device 157 and waits for customers. A process of displaying an effect is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). In the state of FIG. 50(B)(4), the opening/closing sensor remains in the open detection state, so that the output of the opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained, and the light emitters (various lamps 420 etc.) is maintained as the open emission mode.

[Example of operation when front door 102 is closed during execution of setting change]
In the above [Example of operation when setting is changed], the operation in the state where the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened has been described. An example of the case where the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting change will be described below with reference to FIG. 51(A).

First, the states of FIGS. 51(A)(1) and 51(A)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 50(A)(1) and 50(A)(2), respectively. Further, FIGS. 51(A)(3) show the state when the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 51(A)(2) and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. 51(A)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 51(A)(3) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. .

During execution of the setting change process (setting change mode) is before the start of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and the state is not changed by the signal from the open/close sensor. That is, the execution state of the setting change process is maintained, and even if the front door 102 is closed during execution of the setting change process as shown in FIG. status will be maintained. Further, by opening the front door 102 again, the state shown in FIG. 51(A)(4) (same state as FIG. 51(A)(2)) is obtained, and the setting can be changed. Further, not only the execution state of the setting change process, but also the states of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.), sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and effect image display device 157 are maintained. Figures 51(A)(3) and 51(A)(4) show that the state of the device remains unchanged. It should be noted that the setting value display device 101a may be set to a non-display state when the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state.

[Example of operation when front door 102 is closed while confirming setting values]
In the above [Example of operation when confirmation of set value is executed], the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened has been described. An example of the case where the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation will be described below with reference to FIG. 51(B).

First, the states of FIGS. 51(B)(1) and 51(B)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 50(B)(1) and 50(B)(3), respectively. Further, FIG. 51(B)(3) shows the state when the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 51(B)(2) and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. 51(B)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 51(B)(3) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. .

During execution of the set value confirmation process (set value confirmation mode), when the signal from the open/close sensor reaches the closed detection state, the set value confirmation mode is terminated in the same manner as when the setting key is turned off. (Yes in step S606 of FIG. 46). FIG. 51(B)(3) shows that the display on the setting value display device 101a is in a non-display state as a result of the setting value confirmation mode ending with the setting key in the ON state. . It also shows that the state is the same as in FIG. 51(B)(1) except for the state of the setting key.

When the front door 102 is opened again from the state of FIG. 51(B)(3), the set value confirmation mode is started again because the setting key is already in the ON state (see FIG. 46). Determination of Yes in step S603). FIG. 51(B)(4) shows that the state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 51(B)(2).

[Operation example (1) when setting key SW is ON]
In the above [Example of operation when front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation], it has been explained that the setting value confirmation mode ends when the front door 102 is closed while the setting key is in the ON state. In this state, the game can be played while the setting key is in the ON state.

On the other hand, when the setting key is ON, the setting value confirmation mode can be started again by opening the front door 102 during the setting value confirmation valid period. It is configured so that the setting value confirmation mode is not started during the period of . A specific description will be given below using the example of FIG. 52(A).

First, in FIG. 52(A)(1), in the slot machine 100 in the power ON state, the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (playing), and the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light during play. A state in which BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277) during the game, and the effect during the game is displayed on the effect image display device 157 is shown. The front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the setting key SW is in the ON state. In this state, a game is played after the front door 102 is closed while the set value confirmation mode is being executed.

FIGS. 52(A)(2) show the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(1) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. Here, since the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (playing) and it is not the set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation mode is not executed (determination of No in step S602 in FIG. 46). In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), Various lamps 420, etc.) are executed to emit light in an open light emission mode (step S807 in FIG. 48). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the during-game effect is displayed is maintained.

Since the setting value confirmation mode cannot be executed in the state of FIG. 52(A)(2), the game must be terminated at least once in order to execute the setting value confirmation mode. 52(A)(3), after the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(2) and returned to the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(1), the stop button 137 is further pressed. 139 are operated to bring the reels 110 to 112 into a stopped state. In this example, a bell has been won, and a state in which the bell has been won is displayed in the in-game effect of the effect image display device 157 is shown. At this time, the luminous bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) perform an effect corresponding to the winning of the bell.

52(A)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(3) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. In this state, since it is the set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation mode is started again (determination of Yes in step S603 in FIG. 46). FIGS. 52(A)(4) show the same states as those shown in FIGS. 51(B)(2) and 51(B)(4). 52(A)(3), even if the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, it is not the set value confirmation valid period. Confirmation mode is not initiated.

[Operation example (2) when setting key SW is ON]
In the above [Example of operation when setting key SW is ON (1)], an example is described in which the setting value confirmation mode is not started during a period other than the setting value confirmation valid period even when the setting key is in the ON state. bottom. Further, an example different from FIG. 52(A) will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 52(B).

First, FIG. 52(B)(1) shows a state in which three medals are betted (inserted state, before the game is started) in the slot machine 100 in the power-on state, and light emitters (various lamps 420 etc.) emit light in a game lighting mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output BGM during a game, and the effect image display device 157 displays a customer waiting effect. The front door 102 is in the closed state, the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the setting key SW is in the ON state. This state is a state in which a bet operation for starting a game is performed after the front door 102 is closed while the set value confirmation mode is being executed.

FIG. 52(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 52(B)(1) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. Here, three medals have been bet (inserted state), and the setting value confirmation valid period is not yet in effect, so the setting value confirmation mode is not executed (determination of No in step S602 in FIG. 46). In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), Various lamps 420, etc.) are executed to emit light in an open light emission mode (step S807 in FIG. 48). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed is maintained.

Since the setting value confirmation mode cannot be executed in the state of FIG. must be turned on (not turned on). In FIG. 52(B)(3), the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 52(B)(2) and returned to the state shown in FIG. is operated to enter the non-throwing state.

Next, FIG. 52(B)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 52(B)(3) and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. In this state, since it is the set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation mode is started again (determination of Yes in step S603 in FIG. 46). FIG. 52(B)(4) shows the same state as shown in FIGS. 51(B)(2) and 51(B)(4).

[Operation example of error notification and error cancellation (1)]
An example of error cancellation will be described below with reference to FIG. 53(A).

First, FIG. 53(A)(1) shows a state in which a selector error is detected in the slot machine 100 in the power ON state. In this case, an error code ("CE" corresponding to the selector error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47). Upon receiving the error notification start command, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs an error sound for notifying the selector error from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and controls the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) to respond to the selector error. Light is emitted in the error light emission mode, and processing is executed to display a screen informing of a selector error on the effect image display device 157 (step S807 in FIG. 48).

Next, FIG. 53(A)(2) shows a state in which a hopper error is detected in addition to the selector error detected in FIG. 53(A)(1). That is, at this time, two types of errors are detected. When such a plurality of errors are detected, the payout number indicator 127 displays an error code for one of them in order of priority. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the payout number indicator 127 displays the selector error. Further, an error notification start command corresponding to the hopper error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47), and the error notification is executed by the first sub-controller 400 having received this error notification start command. Here, when a plurality of errors are detected in performing error notification by the sound output means or the light emitter, error notification is performed for one of the errors according to the order of priority. In this embodiment, a selector error is set to have a higher priority than a hopper error. corresponds to a selector error. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, in addition to the currently notified selector error, a process is executed to display a screen notifying of a hopper error (step S807 in FIG. 48).

From the state in which the two types of errors described in FIGS. 53A and 53B are detected, the front door 102 is opened to eliminate these errors (error non-detected state), and the reset switch is operated to cancel the error notification. is pressed once. FIG. 53(A)(3) shows the state at this time. When the cause of the error notification is eliminated and the error detection state is resolved, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW (determination of Yes in step S706 in FIG. 47, step S708). However, if multiple errors are detected, one of them will be canceled according to the priority, and a new error notification will be executed for the other errors (only one error will terminate the notification). subject). FIG. 53(A)(3) shows that the error notification for the selector error is cancelled, and the error notification for the remaining hopper error is being executed. Specifically, an error code ("HO" corresponding to a hopper error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) to notify of the hopper error. , the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode corresponding to the hopper error, and the effect image display device 157 displays a screen notifying of the hopper error.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 53(A)(3), it is assumed that the reset SW is pressed once to cancel the remaining error notification. FIG. 53(A)(4) shows the state at this time. When the cause of the error notification is eliminated and the error detection state is resolved, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW (determination of Yes in step S706 in FIG. 47, step S708). FIG. 53(A)(4) shows that the error notification regarding the hopper error has been canceled. Also, in this case, since the open sensor is in the open detection state, the payout number indicator 127 displays a code ("dr" in this example) indicating that the door is open. Further, when the door open detection command is sent to the first sub-controller 400, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound, and the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode. state. Note that the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which a customer waiting effect is displayed.

[Operation example of error notification and error cancellation (2)]
In the above [Error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)], the case where a hopper error occurs after a selector error has been explained, but even if the order of occurrence is reversed, the error cancellation operation is the same. Become. An example of this case will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, FIG. 53(B)(1) shows a state in which a hopper error is detected in the slot machine 100 with the power ON. In this case, an error code ("HO" corresponding to the hopper error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the hopper error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47). Upon receiving the error notification start command, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs an error sound for notifying the hopper error from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and controls the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) to respond to the hopper error. Light is emitted in the error light emission mode, and a process for displaying a screen notifying of a hopper error on the effect image display device 157 is executed (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48).

Next, FIG. 53(B)(2) shows a state in which a selector error is detected in addition to the hopper error detected in FIG. 53(B)(1). That is, at this time, two types of errors are detected. When such a plurality of errors are detected, the payout number indicator 127 displays an error code for one of them in order of priority. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the payout number indicator 127 displays the selector error. Further, an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47), and error notification is executed by the first sub-controller 400 that received this error notification start command. Here, when a plurality of errors are detected when an error is notified by the sound output means or the light emitter, error notification for one of them is performed in accordance with the order of priority. In this embodiment, a selector error is set to have a higher priority than a hopper error. corresponds to a selector error. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, in addition to the currently notified selector error, a process is executed to display a screen notifying of a hopper error (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48).

53(A)(3) and 53(A)(4) for canceling the error notification by operating the reset switch from the state in which the two types of errors are detected as described in FIG. 53(B)(2). ). FIG. 53(B)(3) shows a state in which the error notification of the selector error is canceled by the first operation of the reset SW as in FIG. 53(A)(3). )(4) shows a state in which the error notification of the hopper error is canceled by the second operation of the reset SW, as in FIGS. 53(A)(4).

[Example of error notification and error cancellation during setting change]
An example of the operation when an error is detected during setting change will be described below with reference to FIG. In this operation example, it is assumed that the setting can be changed (before the operation of the start lever 135 is determined in step S311 of FIG. 43 and the set value is confirmed).

First, FIG. 54(A)(1) shows a state in which the power is turned on with the setting key SW in the ON state, and the setting value can be changed (setting change mode). In this setting change process, a setting change start command is transmitted (step S302 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Then, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and a process for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Further, a process (step S303 in FIG. 43) of displaying the current set value using the set value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 54(A)(1) shows how the number 1 indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Also, in this example, the payout number display 127 displays a code ("dr" in this example) indicating that the door is open.

FIG. 54(A)(2) shows the state when a selector error is detected from the state shown in FIG. 54(A)(1). In this case, an error code ("CE" corresponding to the selector error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S305 in FIG. 43). Here, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which execution of error notification by the first sub-controller 400 is restricted during execution of setting change processing or confirmation of set values (step S807 in FIG. 48). Therefore, in FIG. 54(A)(2), all of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.), the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the display means (effect image display device 157) are shown in FIG. 54(A). It is shown that there is no change from the state of (1). That is, the error notification during execution of the setting change process is
It is configured to be executed only by the payout number display 127 . Note that while the setting change process is being executed (setting change mode) is before the start of the main controller timer interrupt process, the state is not changed by the signal from the open/close sensor. FIG. 54(A)(3) shows that even if the front door 102 is closed from the state of FIG. 54(A)(2), the state of FIG. 54(A)(2) is maintained. ing.

The error notification during execution of the setting change process can be canceled by operating the reset SW after the cause of the error notification is removed (error non-detected state) (determination of Yes in step S306 in FIG. 43; step S310). However, since the reset switch is used to add and update the set value, the set value is added when the error notification is canceled. In FIG. 54(A)(4), by operating the reset switch in the state of FIG. and the setting value display device 101a displays the number 2 indicating the setting 2, which is updated by addition from the setting 1. FIG. Note that in a configuration where the reset switch plays a role of both adding and updating the set value and canceling the error notification, the error can be canceled while changing the set value, which may improve convenience.

In FIG. 54(A), the operation in a state in which the setting can be changed (before the operation of the start lever 135 is determined in step S311 in FIG. 43 and the set value is determined) has been described. Even after 135 is operated (after the set value is fixed), the payout number indicator 127 will continue to issue an error notification until the setting change process is completed.

[Example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation]
An example of the operation when an error is detected during setting value confirmation will be described below with reference to FIG. 54(B).

First, FIG. 54(B)(1) shows the state when the selector error is detected after the front door 102 is opened, the setting key SW is turned ON, and the setting value confirmation mode is set. When the front door 102 is opened, the first sub-controller 400 that has received the door open detection command executes door open notification (step S502 in FIG. 45, step S807 in FIG. 48). Specifically, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is being opened"). Then, by turning ON the setting key SW, the process of displaying the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a (step S604 in FIG. 46) is executed, and furthermore, a setting value confirmation start command is transmitted ( step S605 in FIG. 46). In the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this set value check start command, a process for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48).

By the above processing, the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an open sound. , the management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . If an error is detected in this state, an error code (in this example, "CE" corresponding to a selector error) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted ( step S305 in FIG. 43). However, in this embodiment, execution of error notification by the first sub-controller 400 is restricted during execution of setting change processing or confirmation of set values (step S807 in FIG. 48). That is, as shown in FIG. 54(B)(1), the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an open sound, and an effect image is displayed. The state in which the management screen is displayed on the device 157 is maintained. In other words, the error notification during confirmation of the set value is configured to be executed only by the payout number display 127 .

FIG. 54(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 is closed from the state of FIG. 54(B)(1). In this case, by closing the front door 102, the setting value display device 101a is hidden, and the setting value confirmation mode ends (Yes in step S606 of FIG. 46). Furthermore, when the setting value confirmation mode ends, execution of error notification becomes possible. In FIG. 54(B)(2), the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an error sound for notifying a selector error, and the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are illuminated in an error light emission mode corresponding to the selector error. It is shown that light is emitted and a screen for notifying a selector error is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

FIG. 54(B)(3) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state of FIG. 54(B)(2). FIG. 51B illustrates an example in which the setting value confirmation mode is restarted when the front door 102 is opened with the setting key SW in the ON state. It is determined that it is not the valid confirmation period (determination of No in step S602 in FIG. 46). Therefore, the setting value confirmation mode is not started again, and the error notification of FIG. 54(B)(2) is continued. Depending on the error at this time, the game may be put into a state in which it is possible to proceed.

FIG. 54(B)(4) shows the state when the reset SW is operated after the cause of the error notification is removed from the state of FIG. 54(B)(3) (error non-detected state). there is By operating this reset switch, the error notification can be canceled (determination of Yes in step S706 in FIG. 47, step S708). By canceling this error notification, it is determined that the set value confirmation valid period has expired (Yes in step S602 of FIG. 46), and the set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a as shown in FIG. 54(B)(4). It is possible to enter the displayed state (set value confirmation mode).

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 54(B)(3), when the door is opened but the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly changed to the closed detection state, operating the reset switch displays the management screen. It will be in a state where the customer waiting effect is displayed (playable state) instead of the state where it is displayed (setting confirmation mode).

[Conditions for end of error notification]
In the above example, the error notification is canceled by operating the reset switch after the cause of the error notification is removed (error non-detected state). Strictly speaking, the error notification ends when the reset switch is operated. Error notification when the conditions (the cause of the error currently being notified is removed (error non-detected state) and the execution period of the error notification exceeds the period of one cycle of the error sound) are met. can be released. The error notification end condition will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a timing chart regarding error detection.

First, the operation at timings t1 to t6 will be described.

At timing t1, the first selector error is detected. For this selector error, it is shown that the display of the selector error, the output of the selector error sound, and the ON state of the security signal start from timing t1. This security signal is a signal for informing the outside of the slot machine 100 of the occurrence of an error, and is output from the information output circuit 334. FIG.

At timing t2, the reset SW is operated. At this time, the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is not output for one cycle, so the error notification end condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t3, the first selector error is not detected.

At timing t4, the reset SW is operated. Although the selector error is not detected at this time, the selector error sound is not output for one cycle, so the error notification end condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t5, the output of the first cycle of the selector error sound is completed, and the output of the second cycle is started.

At timing t6, the reset SW is operated. At this time, since the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is being output for one cycle, the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification is cancelled. Also, all error reporting ends, and the security signal is turned off.

Next, operations from timings t7 to t12 will be described.

At timing t7, the first hopper error is detected. For this hopper error, the display of the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound, and the ON state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) are shown to start from timing t7.

At timing t8, the first hopper error is not detected, and the second selector error is detected. For this selector error, it is shown that the display of the selector error and the output of the selector error sound start from timing t8. Since the selector error has a higher priority than the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound is temporarily terminated when the selector error sound is output. In addition, the state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) remains unchanged.

At timing t9, the second selector error is not detected.

At timing t10, the reset SW is operated. At this time, since the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is being output for one cycle, the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification corresponding to the selector error is cancelled. On the other hand, the error notification corresponding to the first hopper error is not canceled, and the output of the hopper error sound that had once ended is restarted. In this example, the configuration is such that the hopper error sound is output again from the beginning, but the configuration may be such that the volume is changed without outputting the error sound again. The state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) remains unchanged.

At timing t11, the reset SW is operated. Although the hopper error is not detected at this time, the hopper error sound is not output for one cycle, so the error notification termination condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t12, the reset SW is operated. At this time, the hopper error is not detected and the hopper error sound is being output for one cycle, so the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification is cancelled. Also, all error reporting ends, and the security signal is turned off.

Next, operations from timings t13 to t15 will be described.

At timing t13, a third selector error is detected. In response to this selector error, the display of the selector error, the output of the selector error sound, and the ON state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) start from timing t13.

At timing t14, the third selector error is not detected, and the front door 102 is in the open detection state. In this example, the selector error sound is not output in accordance with the period when the front door 102 is in the open detection state.

At timing t15, the front door 102 is in a closed detection state. In this example, when the front door 102 is detected to be closed, the selector error sound is returned to the output state. In this example, the selector error sound is re-output from the beginning, but the volume may be changed without re-outputting the error sound.

In the above example, the security signal is turned on in accordance with the period during which the error is reported. may be In this configuration, for example, even if a plurality of errors occur, the security signal for the first error is turned on, then turned off for a certain period of time, and then the security signal for the second error is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the number of error occurrences.

In this embodiment, when a plurality of errors have occurred, an error display corresponding to each of the plurality of errors is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. It is also possible to display only the error display of the priority error like the error code displayed in 127 and the error sound output from the sound output means. In this case, when the second selector error is detected at timing t8 in FIG. 55, the display of the selector error and the output of the selector error sound for this selector error start at timing t8, and the selector error becomes a hopper error. Since the priority is higher than , the display of the hopper error and the output of the hopper error sound are temporarily terminated. Then, when the selector error is canceled, the display of the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound, etc. are started as at timing t10.

[Modified example of error notification and error cancellation]
In the above [error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] and [error notification and error cancellation operation example (2)], a plurality of error notifications are executed, and all of the causes of error notification are removed. The operation of operating the reset switch in the state where the error notification is on and canceling one of them in accordance with the order of priority has been described. Here, if the cause of the error notification has been partially eliminated, the error notification may be canceled for the error whose cause has been eliminated. Alternatively, one of the error notifications may be targeted according to the order of priority, and the error notification may be canceled when the cause of the error notification has been eliminated. An operation example when this configuration is adopted will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, the states of FIGS. 56(A)(1) and 56(A)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 53(A)(1) and 53(A)(2), respectively.

From the state in which the two types of errors shown in FIGS. 56A and 56B are detected, the front door 102 is opened to eliminate only the hopper error (error non-detection state), and the reset switch is turned to cancel the error notification. is pressed twice. FIG. 56(A)(3) shows the state at this time.
Here, among the selector error and the hopper error, the selector error with the higher priority is targeted for cancellation, but since the cause of this selector error has not been eliminated, the error notification is not cancelled. FIG. 56(A)(3) shows that the reset SW has been pressed once, but the error notification has not been cancelled. If the reset switch is operated to cancel the error notification of the hopper error whose cause has been eliminated, the error notification will be canceled without the administrator recognizing the hopper error. Since such a situation does not occur in the example of FIG. 56(A), the administrator can cancel the error notification after recognizing the error.

56A and 56C (3) in which the two types of errors are detected, the selector error is eliminated (error non-detected state), and the reset SW is pressed once to cancel the error notification. . FIG. 56(A)(4) shows the state at this time. Here, among the selector error and the hopper error, the selector error with the higher priority is targeted for cancellation, and since the cause of this selector error has been eliminated, the error notification for the selector error is cancelled. FIG. 56(A)(4) shows that as a result of pressing the reset SW once, the error notification of the selector error is cancelled, and the error notification of the remaining hopper error is being executed.

Next, the states of FIGS. 56(B)(1) and 56(B)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 53(B)(1) and 53(B)(2), respectively. The state of FIG. 56(B)(2) is the same as FIG. 56(A)(2), and the following states of FIGS. 56(B)(3) and 56(B)(4) They are the same as FIGS. 56(A)(3) and 56(A)(4), respectively. That is, the example of FIG. 56B differs from that of FIG. 56A in the order of error notification until two types of errors are detected. However, this difference in the order of error reporting has no effect on error cancellation.

[Modified example when the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation]
The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is provided with a front door 102, and in the above [Example of operation when the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation], the slot machine is opened or closed depending on the open/closed state of the front door 102. An example in which 100 states change has been described.

Here, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of doors are provided, for example, the front door 102 is composed of two doors, an upper door and a lower door, how to apply the above operation. It becomes a problem. An example of operation when this configuration is adopted will be described below with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 57, the open/close sensor for the upper door is "open/close detection SW1", and the open/close sensor for the lower door is "open/close detection SW2". It is also assumed that a door key is provided for collectively locking these doors, and the state of this door key is detected by "door key SW". The door key SW has a "closed detection state" in which it detects that it is in a position to lock all doors, and an "open detection state" in which it detects that it is in a position to unlock all doors. A state in which the door key is not inserted is defined as a "non-detection state".

First, in FIG. 57(A)(1), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (waiting for the player to start playing) in the slot machine 100 with the power ON, and the opening/closing detection SW1 and the opening/closing detection SW1 are shown. Both SW2 are in the closed detection state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in the customer waiting light emission mode, and the customer waiting BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 A state in which a customer waiting effect is displayed is shown.

Next, in FIG. 57(A)(2), the door key is used to open both the upper door and the lower door from the state shown in FIG. , and the door key SW are in the open detection state), and the setting key SW is in the ON state. In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), Various lamps 420, etc.) are executed to emit light in an open light emission mode (step S807 in FIG. 48). Furthermore, since the setting key SW is in the ON state, the current setting value can be checked (setting value confirmation mode) (Yes in step S603 of FIG. 46). In this state, a process (step S604 in FIG. 46) of displaying the current set values using the set value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 57(A)(2) shows the setting value display device 101a displaying the numeral 1 indicating setting 1. In FIG. Also, a set value check start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command executes processing for displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157. (Steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48). The output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained as the open sound, and the light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) is maintained as the open light emission mode.

In FIG. 57(A)(3), both the upper door and the lower door are closed from the state shown in FIG. The state when the detection state is reached is shown. During execution of the set value confirmation process (set value confirmation mode), when both the open/close detection SW1 and the open/close detection SW2 and the door key SW are in the closed detection state, the set value confirmation mode is entered in the same manner as when the setting key is turned off. (determination of Yes in step S606 in FIG. 46). FIG. 57(A)(3) shows that the display on the setting value display device 101a is in a non-display state because the setting value confirmation mode is terminated while the setting key is in the ON state. .

When the upper and lower doors are opened again from the state of (A) (3) in FIG. 57, the setting key is already in the ON state, so the set value confirmation mode is started again (Fig. determination of Yes in step S603 of 46). FIG. 57(A)(4) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 57(A)(2).

The above modification is the same as when the front door 102 is opened as described with reference to FIG. It is configured to work. When the open/close detection SW1, the open/close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the closed detection state, the same operation as when the front door 102 is in the closed state described with reference to FIG. 51(B) is performed. It is configured to Here, the operation when the open/close detection SW1, the open/close detection SW2, and the door key SW do not all match will be described with reference to FIG. 57(B).

First, the states of FIGS. 57(B)(1) and 57(B)(2) are the same as those of FIGS. 57(A)(1) and 57(A)(2), respectively. Further, FIG. 57(B)(3) shows the state shown in FIG. 57(B)(2) when only the upper door is in the closed state (the open/close detection SW1 is in the closed detection state) and the door key is pulled out (door key SW is not detected). FIG. 57(B)(4) shows the state when the lower door is in the closed state (open/close detection SW2 is in the closed detection state) from the state shown in FIG. 57(B)(3). . FIG. 57(B)(5) shows the state when the door key is inserted from the state shown in FIG. (same state as FIG. 57(A)(3)).

In FIG. 57(B)(3), after the opening/closing detection SW1, the opening/closing detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the open detection state, these states do not match, and if the set value confirmation state does not exist, It is indicated that the game is in a state that is neither playable state (playable state). In this state, the set values displayed on the set value display device 101a are hidden, and the effect image display device 157 displays the message "The door is open." In this state, the game cannot be started.

Further, in FIG. 57(B)(4), although the open/close detection SW1 and the open/close detection SW2 are in the closed detection state, the door key SW is in the non-detection state (open/close detection SW1, open/close detection SW2, door key SW does not match), and in this case also, it is indicated that the game is in a non-playable state. After that, when the door key is inserted to lock all the doors (the door key SW is closed detection state), a game becomes possible as shown in FIG. 3) same state).

As in the example of FIG. 57(A), when a plurality of doors are provided, the setting value is confirmed in the same manner as when the front door 102 is in an open state when all of the plurality of doors are in an open state. The setting value confirmation state may be ended in the same manner as when the front door 102 is in the closed state when all of the plurality of doors are in the closed state. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 57(A), not only the states of the plurality of doors but also the state of the door key are determined together, but the state of the door key may not be determined. Also, in FIG. 57(B), an example in which a game becomes impossible when the states of a plurality of doors or door keys do not match during the period from the transition to the set value confirmation state to the end of this has been described. , the configuration may be such that such a state is not provided. Also, unlike the example of FIG. 57, for example, the transition to the setting value confirmation state may be performed based on the state of one of a plurality of doors, or the setting value confirmation state may be set based on the state of the door key. You may make it move to.

[Regarding the check operation of the production means]
In this embodiment, various effects means such as the effect image display device 157, shutter 163, speakers 272 and 277, and various lamps 420 are provided. An example of the confirmation operation of such effect means will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. In the present embodiment, when the front door 102 (open/close sensor) is closed during setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode) ends. It is assumed that even if the front door 102 (open/close sensor) is closed during setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode) is continued without ending.

[Check operation of production means (1)]
The example of FIG. 58 is an example of the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 . In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 is provided with an effect lamp 163L.

FIGS. 58A to 58F are diagrams showing an example of the flow of operations when power is turned on. In this example, it is assumed that when the power is turned on, the shutter 163 in the initial position is closed and then returned to the initial position for confirmation.

FIG. 58(a) shows the state before the power is turned on. In this state, nothing is displayed on the effect image display device 157 and nothing is output from the speakers 272 and 277 . The shutter 163 is positioned on the left and right sides of the effect image display device 157. This position is the state in which the shutter 163 is completely open, and this position is the initial position.

FIG. 58(b) shows the state when the power is turned on from the state of FIG. 58(a). In this state, the effect image display device 157 displays the message "starting up", and the speakers 272 and 277 output the voice "the power has been turned on". Note that the shutter 163 remains at the initial position.

In FIG. 58(c), the demonstration effect is started by the effect image display device 157 from the state of FIG. is shown. It also shows that the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 is started, and the shutter 163 that was in the initial position is moving in the closing direction. Also, at this time, the production lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 is in the lighting mode for the demonstration production.

FIG. 58(d) shows that the shutter 163 has moved further from the state shown in FIG. 58(c) to a completely closed state.

FIG. 58(e) shows that the shutter 163 is moving toward the initial position from the state of FIG. 58(d).

FIG. 58(f) shows that the shutter 163 has returned to the initial position from the state of FIG. 58(e).

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to (f), it is possible to confirm whether or not the shutter 163 operates normally by the confirmation operation when the power is turned on.

Further, during the confirming operation, the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 changes as the opening/closing state of the front door 102 changes. The state of the front door 102 can also be confirmed by this change. It should be noted that extinguishing may be one of the lighting equivalents for the change in the lighting mode. FIGS. 58(g) and 58(h) show a state when the opening/closing state of the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 58(b) (for example, from the closed state to the open state). 58(g) and (h) show that the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L changes due to the change in the opening/closing state of the front door 102 in the states shown in FIGS. 58(c) and (d), respectively. It is In this example, since the front door 102 is in an open state, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a voice saying "the door is open." As shown in the flow from FIG. 58(h) to FIG. 58(e), the lighting mode of the production preparation lamp 163L that changes due to the change in the open/closed state of the front door 102 is changed by the change in the open/closed state of the front door 102. Undo by returning to the previous state. Also, in this example, since the front door 102 is closed, the output from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped.

[Check operation of production means (2)]
The example of FIG. 59 is an example of confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 . In this example, it is assumed that the confirmation operation is executed by an operation from the management screen. Note that the management screen here is not limited to the one displayed during the setting change or setting value confirmation described above, and may be displayed by a specific operation by the administrator, for example.

FIG. 59( a ) shows a state in which a management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . Here, "operation check" is selected from the menu displayed on this management screen, the screen is switched to the screen shown in FIG. is selected.

The confirmation operation started by selecting the above "speaker check" is to output confirmation sounds in the order of the right speaker, the left speaker, and the lower speaker, and select "speaker check end". Until then, the above voice output is repeated in order. Note that the number of repetitions may be set in advance, or the execution time of the confirmation operation may be set in advance.

FIGS. 59(c) to (e) show how the right speaker, the left speaker, and the lower speaker are output in this order as the first output in the confirmation operation. FIG. 59(f) shows the output from the right speaker in the second output in the confirmation operation.

If "speaker check" is selected again during execution of the confirmation operation, the confirmation operation being executed is terminated and a new confirmation operation is executed.

In FIGS. 59(g) to (i), "speaker check" is selected from the menu displayed on the screen of FIG. 59(b), and the first output in the confirmation operation is the right speaker , is shown. Here, in FIG. 59(j), by selecting "speaker check" again in the state of FIG. , the output from the right speaker is shown. After that, FIG. 59(k) shows that the confirmation operation being executed has ended by selecting "speaker check end" in the state of FIG. 59(j).

Here, in the above example, the configuration in which the confirmation operation is terminated by selecting "speaker check end" has been described. can be In FIG. 59(l), since the front door 102 is opened from the state of FIG. 59(i), the confirming operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is completed, and the voice "The door is open" is output. It is shown that In this case, the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 may be resumed when the front door 102 is closed, or may not be resumed. When the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is resumed, the confirmation operation may be resumed from the state when the front door 102 is opened, or when the front door 102 is opened. A new confirmation operation may be started regardless of the state of .

[Check operation of production means (3)]
The example of FIG. 60 is an example of the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 . In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 is provided with an effect lamp 163L. In this example, it is assumed that the confirmation operation is executed by operation from the management screen (see FIG. 59(b)). Note that the management screen here is not limited to the one displayed during the setting change or setting value confirmation described above, and may be displayed by a specific operation by the administrator, for example.

FIG. 60(a) shows a menu displayed when "operation check" is selected from the management screen. Here, it is assumed that "movable object check" is selected from this menu.

60(b) to (f) show that the shutter 163 is closed from the initial position where the shutter 163 is completely open, and then returned to the initial position for confirmation. ing.

During execution of this confirmation operation, while the front door 102 is in an open state, the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 changes. FIG. 60(c) shows that the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L is changed by opening the front door 102 . Also, while the front door 102 is in the open state, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a voice saying "the door is open." In addition, FIG. 60(d) shows that the front door 102 is closed so that the lighting mode of the performance lamp 163L is restored and the output from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. .

Further, when "movable object check" is selected again during execution of this confirmation operation, the confirmation operation is not newly started, and nothing is executed in response to this operation. In FIG. 60(d), "movable object check" is selected again during execution of the confirmation operation, but in FIG. It is shown that there are

FIG. 60(g) shows a menu displayed when "operation check" is selected from the management screen. Here, it is assumed that "movable object check" is selected from this menu.

FIGS. 60(h) to 60(l) show that the shutter 163 is closed from the initial position where the shutter 163 is completely open, and then returned to the initial position for confirmation. ing.

If "speaker check" is selected during execution of this confirming operation, the confirming operation of the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60(k) shows that the confirming operation of the shutter 163 and the confirming operation of the speakers 272 and 277 are being executed in parallel. Further, FIG. 60(l) shows that when the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 is completed, the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is continuously executed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Hereinafter, configurations of the invention based on the above embodiments will be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above description (especially [Example of operation when confirming setting values] [Example of operation when front door 102 is closed while confirming setting values]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
A door body (for example, a front door 102) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed;
open/close determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door;
a predetermined operation means (for example, setting key SW) having a first operation state (for example, setting key SW is OFF) and a second operation state (for example, setting key SW is ON) as operation states; , a playground equipment comprising:
The main control means is
A game ready state in which the game can be progressed, and a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed (for example, when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 of FIG. 46) state) can be set from among a plurality of states including at least
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the open state, and the predetermined operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. It is possible to start (for example, change from the state of FIG. 50(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 50(B)(3)),
When it is determined by the opening/closing determination means that the door body is in the closed state in the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is maintained even if the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state. Means capable of ending and starting the playable state (for example, a change from the state of FIG. 51(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 51(B)(3)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to enter a state in which a game can be played simply by closing the door from the setting confirmation state. Also, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation state from being seen by the player, thereby improving security.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The main control means is
In the state where the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state in the game enabled state, if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the game Means capable of ending the enable state and starting the setting confirmation state (for example, changing from the state of FIG. 51(B)(3) to the state of FIG. 51(B)(4));
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machines described above, for example, when a manager tries to play a game, he or she can immediately check the set value by simply opening the door before or after this. In addition, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is immediately entered simply by opening the door, so that the administrator can immediately notice that the setting confirmation state was not ended in the normal procedure. .

In addition, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
The main control means is
In the state where the game is enabled and the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state, if the reel is rotating, the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the open state. 52(A)(1) to FIG. 52(A) (1). (A) change to the state of (2)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, if the door is opened during a game, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, so by not controlling to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to improve security. .

In addition, the game machine described above,
error detection means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of detecting a predetermined error;
further comprising an error notification means (for example, payout number display 127) capable of executing a predetermined error notification,
The error reporting means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification can be executed in the setting confirmation state (for example, FIG. 54 (B) (1)),
Means for not restarting the setting confirmation state when the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means (for example, [Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 46 No judgment in step S602, change from the state of FIG. 54(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 54(B)(3)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machines mentioned above, if the door is opened while an error is being reported, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is taking place. can.

In addition, the above explanations (especially [example of operation when changing settings] [example of operation when confirming setting values] [example of operation when front door 102 is closed while changing settings] [setting Example of operation when the front door 102 is closed during execution of value confirmation]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
A door body (for example, a front door 102) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed;
open/close determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door;
a predetermined operation means (for example, setting key SW) having a first operation state (for example, setting key SW is OFF) and a second operation state (for example, setting key SW is ON) as operation states; a game table comprising:
The main control means is
A game-ready state in which the game can be played, and a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be checked (for example, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 of FIG. 46). , and a plurality of states including at least a setting change state in which any set value can be set from among a plurality of set values (for example, a state in which the set value can be changed in steps S306 and S307 of FIG. 43) Any one of the states can be set,
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the open state, and the predetermined operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. It is possible to start (for example, change from the state of FIG. 50(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 50(B)(3)),
The setting change state can be started based on power being turned on while the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state (for example, FIG. 50(A) (1 ) to the state of FIG. 50 (A) (2)),
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state in the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is maintained even if the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state. It is possible to end and start the playable state (for example, change from the state of FIG. 51(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 51(B)(3)),
In the setting change state, even if the door body is determined to be in the closed state by the open/close determination means, the game ready state is not started (for example, from the state of FIG. 51(A) (2) FIG. 51 (A) (change to state (3)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to enter a state in which a game can be played simply by closing the door from the setting confirmation state. Also, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation state from being seen by the player, thereby improving security.

On the other hand, regarding the setting change state, if the game can be started immediately by simply closing the door when the normal procedure is not completed, the setting value may not be set as expected by the administrator. may occur. Therefore, security and convenience can be improved by preventing the game from starting when the door is closed, unlike the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The main control means is
In the state where the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state in the game enabled state, if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the game Means capable of ending the enable state and starting the setting confirmation state (for example, changing from the state of FIG. 51(B)(3) to the state of FIG. 51(B)(4));
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machines described above, for example, when a manager tries to play a game, he or she can immediately check the set value by simply opening the door before or after this. In addition, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is immediately entered simply by opening the door, so that the administrator can immediately notice that the setting confirmation state was not ended in the normal procedure. .

In addition, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
The main control means is
In the state where the game is enabled and the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state, if the reel is rotating, the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the open state. 52(A)(1) to FIG. 52(A) (1). (A) change to the state of (2)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, if the door is opened during a game, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out, so by not controlling to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to improve security. .

In addition, the game machine described above,
error detection means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of detecting a predetermined error;
further comprising an error notification means (for example, payout number display 127) capable of executing a predetermined error notification,
The error reporting means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification can be executed in the setting confirmation state (for example, FIG. 54 (B) (1)),
Means for not restarting the setting confirmation state when the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means (for example, [Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 46 No judgment in step S602, change from the state of FIG. 54(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 54(B)(3)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machines mentioned above, if the door is opened while an error is being reported, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is taking place. can.

In addition, in the above description (especially [effect means check operation (1)] [effect means check operation (2)] [effect means check operation (3)]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls games,
production means including first production means (for example, speakers 272 and 277) and second production means (for example, shutter 163) different from the first production means;
a predetermined operating means (for example, a cross button);
Predetermined confirmation operation for the production means (for example, FIGS. 58(b) to (f), FIG. 5
9 (c) ~ (e)) a confirmation operation means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),
The main control means is
means for setting a predetermined state (for example, a state in which a management screen is displayed);
The confirmation operation means is
When a first operation (for example, selection of "speaker check" in FIG. 59(b)) is performed on the predetermined operating means in the predetermined state, the confirming operation on the first effect means can be executed. is possible and
When a second operation (for example, selection of "movable body check" in FIG. 60(a)) is performed on the predetermined operation means in the predetermined state, the confirmation operation is performed on the second effect means. is possible and
When the first operation is performed while the first effect means is executing the confirmation action, the confirmation action being executed is terminated and a new confirmation action for the first effect means is performed. While starting (eg, changing from FIG. 59(i) to FIG. 59(j) state),
Even if the second operation is performed while the second effect means is executing the confirmation action, the confirmation action being executed is not terminated (for example, FIG. 60(d) to FIG. 60( e) is a change) means to the state of
A game machine characterized by:

The effect means of the game table is not limited to the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420, the effect image display device 157, and the shutter 163 of the present embodiment, but also includes, for example, vibration means. actions can be performed. In the amusement machine described above, in executing the confirming action of the effecting means, the convenience of confirming the action is enhanced by dividing the effecting means into the first effecting means and the second effecting means according to the characteristics thereof. may be possible. Note that the first effect means and the second effect means are not limited to the structure of the effect means of this embodiment.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first effect means includes a plurality of effect means (e.g., left speaker, right speaker, lower speaker),
The confirmation action for the first effect means is an action of sequentially executing a predetermined action for each of the plurality of effect means included in the first effect means (for example, FIG. 59(c)). ~ operation of (e)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, even if confirmation actions are performed for a plurality of effect means, by performing the first operation, the action can be immediately confirmed again from the first effect means, which is convenient when confirming the action. can improve sexuality. As for the first effect means, various effect means can be adopted without being limited to the structure of the effect means of the present embodiment.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The confirmation operation means is
When the power is turned on, even if the second operation is not performed on the operation means, the confirmation operation may be performed on the second effect means (for example, FIG. 58(a) to operation of (f)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, a new confirmation action can be performed even during the confirmation action with respect to the first effect means, but a new confirmation action can be performed during the confirmation action with respect to the second effect means. Can not. However, by providing an opportunity to execute the confirmation operation for the second effect means when the power is turned on, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to confirm the operation for the second effect means. In addition, it is possible to quickly detect a malfunction by checking operation when the power is turned on. Note that the confirmation operation for the second effect means when the power is turned on is not limited to a configuration that is always executed, and may be executed depending on some condition.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The confirmation operation means is
When the second operation is performed while the first effect means is executing the confirmation action, the confirmation action for the first effect means is continued while the confirmation action for the second effect means is performed. It is possible to cause a confirmation operation to be performed (for example, the operation of FIG. 60(k)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, the confirmation operation of the first effect means and the confirmation operation of the second effect means can be executed in parallel, thereby shortening the time required for confirming the operation.

In addition, the game machine described above,
further comprising setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The predetermined state is
a setting change state in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set;
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, the game machine described above,
further comprising setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The predetermined state is
A setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed,
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first directing means is means for outputting sound,
The second effect means is a movable body,
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, in the above description (especially [error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] [error notification and error cancellation operation example (2)] [error notification termination conditions]),
a first error detection means (e.g. selector sensor) capable of detecting a first error (e.g. selector error);
Error notification means capable of executing error notification (for example, payout number indicator 127, speakers 272, 277);
A game machine comprising a predetermined operation means (for example, reset SW) capable of canceling the error notification,
The error reporting means is
When the first error detection means detects the first error, it is possible to execute the first error notification of the detection of the first error (for example, FIG. 53(A) (1)),
During the first period after the execution of the first error notification (for example, the period until "There is a selector error" is output once), the first error notification is not performed even if the cancellation operation is performed. Continuously (for example, timings t2 and t4 in FIG. 55), the first error notification is terminated when the cancellation operation is performed after the first period has passed since the execution of the first error notification. means (for example, step S309, step S318 in FIG. 43, and error notification end conditions in step S707 in FIG. 47, timing t6 in FIG. 55),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above game machine, since the error is not canceled for the first period after the error notification is executed, the manager (or the player) can more surely grasp that the error has occurred, and the security is improved. can be achieved. In the above-described embodiment, the first period is the period of one error sound cycle. The period is not limited. Moreover, the above configuration can be applied to various types of errors, not limited to the errors in the above embodiments.

In addition, the game machine described above,
Security signal output means (for example, information output circuit 443) for outputting a security signal to the outside of the gaming machine based on the occurrence of an error,
The security signal output means is
means for continuing to output the security signal during the first period after the first error notification is performed (for example, FIG. 55);
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, by securing the output time of the security signal, the security signal can be normally output to the outside, and the security can be improved.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first error notification is
A notification including a sound in which a predetermined announcement sound (for example, the sound of "selector error") is repeatedly output,
The first period is
is a period longer than the period required to output one time of the predetermined announcement sound,
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, an announcement sound is output at least once until the error is cleared, so that the manager (or the player) can more reliably grasp that the error has occurred. Security can be improved.

In addition, the game machine described above,
A door body (for example, a front door 102) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed;
an opening/closing detection means (for example, an opening/closing sensor) capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the door body;
The predetermined operating means is
Means provided at a position operable only when the door is in an open state,
The first error notification is
Notification including display of a predetermined error image (for example, the image of the effect image display device 157 in FIG. 53(A)(1)),
The error reporting means is
When the open state is detected by the opening/closing detection means when executing the first error notification, the audio output of the first error notification is stopped and the predetermined error image is displayed ( For example, timings t14 to t15 in FIG. 55),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine above, when the administrator opens the door while the error is being reported in order to cancel the error, the output of the error sound is stopped while the error image is kept to a minimum. You can eliminate the annoyance of sound.

In addition, the game machine described above,
Further comprising a second error detection means (e.g., hopper sensor) capable of detecting a second error (e.g., hopper error),
The error reporting means is
When the second error detection means detects the second error, it is possible to execute a second error notification to notify that the second error has been detected (for example, FIG. 53(B)). (1)),
There is a case where the first error notification is terminated and the second error notification is started (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, timing t10 in FIG. 55),
In the second error notification in the first case, in the second period from the execution of the second error notification (for example, the period until "There is a hopper error" is output once) Continue the second error notification even if the release operation is performed (for example, timings t10 to t12 in FIG. 55),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, since a period is provided for error notification to be reliably executed for each of a plurality of errors, it is possible for the manager (or the player) to more reliably grasp that each error has occurred. Security can be improved. In the above-described embodiment, the second period is a period corresponding to one cycle of the error sound. The period is not limited.

In addition, in the above description (particularly, [Error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] [Error notification and error cancellation operation example during setting change]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
error detection means (eg, selector sensor) capable of detecting a predetermined error (eg, selector error);
A gaming machine equipped with an error notification means (for example, a payout number display 127, speakers 272, 277) capable of executing error notification,
The main control means is
A game ready state in which the game can be progressed, and a setting change state in which one of a plurality of set values can be set (for example, when the set value is changed in steps S306 and S307 in FIG. 43). any one of a plurality of states including at least a possible state) can be set,
The error reporting means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means, it is possible to execute a predetermined error notification for notifying that the predetermined error has been detected (for example, FIG. 53(A)(1), FIG. 54). (A) (2)),
In the playable state, the predetermined error notification is executed in the first mode (for example, FIG. 53 (A) (1)),
Means for executing the predetermined error notification in a second mode different from the first mode in the setting change state (for example, FIG. 54 (A) (2)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine, the mode of error notification is differentiated between the playable state in which the player plays a game and the setting change state in which the administrator changes the setting value. In this way, by varying the mode of error notification according to the situation, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game machine that does not make the administrator feel troublesome while maintaining security. As for the error notification means, various notification means can be employed without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first mode is a mode that is more conspicuous than the second mode, a mode that is louder than the second mode, or a mode that is easier to recognize than the second mode (for example, FIG. 54 ( A) In (2), the error notification is performed only by the payout number display 127, but in FIG.
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine, it is easier to grasp the error notification in the playable state in which the player plays a game than in the setting change state in which the administrator changes the setting value. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that ensures that the error notification is transmitted more reliably and does not make the manager feel troublesome during the error processing stage.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The plurality of states include a setting confirmation state in which the currently set value can be confirmed (for example, a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 of FIG. 46). ,
The error reporting means is
In the setting confirmation state, it is a means for executing the predetermined error notification in the second mode (for example, [Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 54 (B) (1) ),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine, the setting confirmation state in which the administrator confirms the setting value is configured to be in the same error notification mode as the setting change state. In this way, by varying the mode of error notification according to the situation, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game machine that does not make the administrator feel troublesome while maintaining security.

In addition, the game machine described above,
A door body (for example, a front door 102) that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed;
open/close determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door;
a predetermined operation means (for example, setting key SW) having a first operation state (for example, setting key SW is OFF) and a second operation state (for example, setting key SW is ON) as operation states; , further comprising
The main control means is
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door is in the open state, and the predetermined operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. means capable of starting (for example, changing from the state of FIG. 50(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 50(B)(3)),
The error reporting means is
When it is determined by the opening/closing determination means that the door body is in the closed state while the predetermined error notification is being performed in the second mode in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification is not performed. Change the notification mode from the second mode to the first mode (for example, change from the state of FIG. 54 (B) (1) to the state of FIG. 54 (B) (2)),
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, the mode of error notification changes at the moment the door is closed, so that the manager can easily notice that he/she has forgotten to cancel the error.

In addition, in the above description (especially [error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] [error notification and error cancellation operation example (2)]),
an error detection means capable of detecting an error (e.g. selector sensor, hopper sensor);
a first notification means capable of executing error notification (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising a predetermined operation means (for example, reset SW) capable of canceling the error notification,
The error detection means is
A first error detection means (e.g. selector sensor) capable of detecting a first error (e.g. selector error) and a second error detection means (e.g. , hopper sensor) and
The first reporting means is
When the first error detection means detects the first error, a first error notification (for example, FIG. 53(A)(1)) for notifying that the first error has been detected is generated. is executable and
When the second error detection means detects the second error, a second error notification (for example, FIG. 53(B)(1)) for notifying that the second error has been detected is generated. is executable and
When the second error is detected by the second error detection means while the first error is detected by the first error detection means (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed (for example, FIG. 53 (A) (2)),
Removal of the cause of the first error and cause of the second error in the first case where the first error notification and the second error notification are being performed When the cancellation operation is performed once after the removal of, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued (for example, FIG. 53 (A) (3)),
A game machine characterized by:

Even if the above two types of error factors are removed, the above game machine can improve security by prompting the administrator to check each error location by gradually canceling the error. .

In addition, the game machine described above,
A second notification means (for example, a payout number indicator 127) capable of executing error notification,
The second notification means is means for executing the first error notification but not executing the second error notification in the first case (for example, FIG. 53(A)(2)). ,
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, it may be possible to improve security by reporting the first error at two locations.

In addition, the game machine described above,
The first reporting means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detection means while the second error is detected by the second error detection means (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed (for example, FIG. 53 (B) (2)),
removing the cause of the first error and the cause of the second error in the second case where the first error notification and the second error notification are being performed; When the cancellation operation is performed once after the removal of, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued (for example, FIG. 53 (B) (3)),
A game machine characterized by:

Even if the above two types of error factors are removed, the above game machine can improve security by prompting the administrator to check each error location by gradually canceling the error. .

In addition, the game machine described above,
The second notification means is means for executing the first error notification but not executing the second error notification in the second case (for example, FIG. 53(B)(2)). ,
A game machine characterized by:

In the amusement machine described above, it may be possible to improve security by reporting the first error at two locations.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, rock-paper game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , and those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 symbol display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 156 effect button 157 effect image display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 500 second sub-control unit

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
A door body that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
open/close determination means for determining an open/closed state of the door;
a predetermined operating means having a first operating state and a second operating state as operating states;
A game machine comprising display means,
The door body includes a first door body and a second door body,
The main control means is
A plurality of states including at least a playable state in which the game can be progressed, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set values can be confirmed, and a game impossible state in which the game cannot be progressed. can be set to either
When the opening/closing determination means determines that both the first door body and the second door body are in the open state, the predetermined operation means changes from the first operation state to the second operation. when operated into a state, capable of initiating said verify settings state;
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the first door body is in the closed state and the opening/closing determination means determines that the second door body is in the open state, the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state, it is possible to make the game impossible state,
When the opening/closing determination means determines that both the first door body and the second door body are in the closed state, the predetermined operation means remains operated to the second operation state. , means for enabling the playable state,
The display means is
In the playable state, it is possible to display an effect display according to the game situation,
In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to display a display for administrator,
Means capable of displaying a certain display in the unplayable state,
The certain display is a display different from the effect display and is a display different from the display for administrator,
A playground characterized by:

Images